Sony DAV-TZ200 Operating instructions

4-122-242-41(1) DVD Home Theatre System ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ DAV-TZ100 / TZ200 / TZ300 ©2009 Sony Corporation ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ – اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أدﻭات ﺑﴫﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﲔ ﳌﺨﺎﻃﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﳉﻬﺎز ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰاﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫أﻭ اﳋﺰاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮاﻛﺐ ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫ﺑﺠﺮاﺋﺪ أﻭ ﻣﻔﺎرش اﳌﻨﻀﺪة أﻭ اﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻣﺼﺎدر‬ ‫ﳍﺐ ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺸﻤﻌﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ أﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮات أﻭ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ اﳌﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﺷﻴﺎء ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﳌﺰﻫﺮﻳﺎت‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت أﻭ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﳊﺮارة‬ ‫زاﺋﺪة‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ أﻭ اﻟﻨﺎر أﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺣﺪﻭث اﺻﺎﺑﺎت‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ‪ /‬اﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺒﲈ ﺟﺎء ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ اﳌﺒﻨﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﺼ ﹼﻨﻒ ﻛﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺰر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪CLASS١‬‬ ‫‪ 1 .LASER‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ اﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﲈ أﻥ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﱰدد‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻻ ﺣﻈﺖ أﻱ ﺷﺊ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻓﻮر ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳﲈء أﻭ اﺳﲈء ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ "‪ "DVD‬ﻛﻌﺒﺎرة ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻭ‪DVD+RW/DVD+R‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪.DVD-RW/DVD-R‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﱪاءات اﻻﺧﱰاع اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﳚﺐ أﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻨﴩ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﱰﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ ،Macrovision‬ﻭأﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳐﺼﺼ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻷﻏﺮاض اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﻷﻏﺮاض اﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬ ‫اﳌﺤﺪﻭدة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺎ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺧﺼ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.Macrovision‬‬ ‫ﹸﳛﻈﺮ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻔﻲ أﻭ اﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ اﻟﻌﻜﴘ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات داﺋﺮة اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪*Dolby Digital‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ )‪Dolby Pro Logic (II‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DTS** Digital Surround‬‬ ‫‪.System‬‬ ‫* ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺑﺘﴫﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫دﻭﻟﺒﻲ‪ ،Pro Logic ،‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ د‪-‬اﳌﺰدﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫دﻭﻟﺒﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫** ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﲢﺖ ﺑﺮاءة اﺧﱰاع أﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ أرﻗﺎﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪5,451,942‬؛ ‪5,956,674‬؛ ‪5,974,380‬؛ ‪5,978,762‬؛ ‪6,487,535‬‬ ‫& ﺑﺮاءات اﺧﱰاع أﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻨﺸﻮرة & ﰲ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﻨﴩ‪ DTS .‬ﻭ‪ DTS Digital Surround‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﻭرﻣﻮز ‪ DTS‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ .DTS, Inc. ©1996-2008 .DTS, Inc.‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪High-Definition Multimedia‬‬ ‫)‪.Interface (HDMITM‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎر ‪ HDMI‬ﻭاﻟﻌﺒﺎر ‪High-Definition‬‬ ‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ اﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ اﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻌﺎرات "‪ "DVD-RW‬ﻭ "‪ "DVD-R‬ﻭ "‪ "DVD+RW‬ﻭ‬ ‫"‪ "DVD+R‬ﻭ "‪ "DVD VIDEO‬ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎرات "‪ "CD‬ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "BRAVIA‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪Sony‬‬ ‫‪.Corporation‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "PLAYSTATION‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪Sony‬‬ ‫‪.Computer Entertainment Inc.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻌﺎرات "‪ "WALKMAN‬ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎر "‪"WALKMAN‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ®‪ DivX‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ اﺑﺘﻜﺎرﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.DivX, Inc.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻌﺎر ‪ DivX‬ﻭ ‪ DivX Certified‬ﻭاﻟﺸﻌﺎرات‬ ‫اﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ .DivX, Inc.‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﺑﱰﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ MPEG‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ﻭﺑﺮاءة اﻻﺧﱰاع‬ ‫اﳌﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬ﻭ ‪.Thomson‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﳌﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﴫﻱ ‪MPEG-4‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮاءة اﻻﺧﱰاع‬ ‫‪ MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﻭﻏﲑ اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻧﺴﺠﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﳌﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﴫﻱ )"‪ ("MPEG-4 VIDEO‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﲑﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬أﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﳎﻬﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪MPEG‬‬ ‫‪ LA‬ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺻﺪار ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﳚﻴﺰ‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻳﺪﻝ ﺿﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‪ ،‬أﻱ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫ﻷﻏﺮاض ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ اﳌﺒﻴﻌﺎت ﻭاﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺪاﺧﲇ ﻭاﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻱ‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﱰاﺧﻴﺺ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ .MPEG LA, LLC‬راﺟﻊ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ‪2 .......................‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ‪5 ......................‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :1‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.....................‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.....................‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :3‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪26 .......................... Quick Setup‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :4‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﺪر ‪28 .....................‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :5‬اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪29 .......‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪31 ..................................‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‪36 ...........................‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‪ /‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪39 ..........‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪41 ......JPEG‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪45 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪47 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪47 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪49 ........‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ‪56 ............‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ‪57 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ‬ ‫‪59 ......................... "BRAVIA" Sync‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺟﻬﺎز ‪61 ....................... USB‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪69 .................... USB‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪73 ........ Sony Ericsson‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ ‪74 ......‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ‪75 ..................................‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪75 ...........................‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر ‪76 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ادﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪77 ............................................‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪77 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪78 ...............‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪78 ..............‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ ‪81 .............‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ‪82 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪83 ....................‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻱ اﳋﻠﻞ ﻭإﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪84 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ ‪92 .........................‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪93 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺠﻢ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت‪95 ..............................‬‬ ‫أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻒ ‪97 .....................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ‪98 ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻷﺟﺰاء ﻭأزرار اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪99 ...................‬‬ ‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪103 ......................‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ‪107 .......................................‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻮع‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+R/DVD+RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪(DVD-R DL‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻻﺻﺪار ‪ 1.1‬ﻭ ‪(2.0‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪CD‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫‪Super Audio‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Audio CD‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪DATA CD‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪DATA DVD‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ (2JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬ ‫‪ (3ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬أﻭ ‪) Joliet‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻤﺘﺪة(‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/‬‬ ‫‪ DVD+R/DVD+RW‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DATA‬‬ ‫‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ (1MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ (2JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪(Universal Disk Format) UDF‬‬ ‫‪ (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) MP3 (1‬ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ .ISO/MPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﳚﺐ اﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﳚﺐ اﻥ ﺗﺘﲈﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ‪) .DCF‬اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪) "Design rule for Camera File system" DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا(‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﲑات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻭﺟﺪﻫﺎ اﻻﲢﺎد اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﲏ ﻟﻠﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪.((JEITA) Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻭاﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ ،CD-ROM‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﲑ ‪) International Organization for Standardization) ISO‬اﳌﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺣﻴﺪ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ((‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺪﳎﺔ )‪.(CD‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎت ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻨﴩ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻮﰲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺪﳎﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ،(CD‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺗﻠﻚ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻏﲑ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪5‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD-ROM‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪PHOTO CD‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺰء اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD-Extra‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD Graphics‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD Audio‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪MPEG4‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-RAM‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Blu-ray‬‬ ‫ﻛﲈ اﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(7‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻠﺐ(‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭرﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ أﻭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳊﺎﻻت‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪،CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬ ‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺤﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ إذا ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﺘﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD+RW/DVD+R‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﺗﻢ ﲣﺘﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.Packet Write‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪Multi Session‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ Multi Session‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﰲ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ Multi Session‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨ ﹰﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ أﻭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ CD‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ اﻷﻭﱃ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻚ ﻫﺬا ﻋﲆ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﰲ اﳉﺰء اﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ALL‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ]‪[Playback prohibited by area limitations.‬‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﻈﻮر ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ (.‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ إﺷﺎرة ﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﳏﻈﻮر ﹰا ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻭأﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﺪ ﹰا ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﲈ أﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﳑﻴﺰات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮاءة ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻭأﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫إﺧﺮاج ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﻮة‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-TZ100‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) FM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫أﻭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﻋﺪد ‪ ،6‬أﲪﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫أﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬أﺧﴬ‪/‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‪/‬‬ ‫أزرﻕ‪/‬ارﺟﻮاﲏ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-TZ200‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) FM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ )ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫أﻭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﻋﺪد ‪ ،6‬أﲪﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫أﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬أﺧﴬ‪/‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‪/‬‬ ‫أزرﻕ‪/‬ارﺟﻮاﲏ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮرة‬ ‫ﻭاﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﻭاﻟﻔﻠﺒﲔ ﻭاﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻭاﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ )ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-TZ300‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫أﻭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﻋﺪد ‪ ،6‬أﲪﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫أﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬أﺧﴬ‪/‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‪/‬‬ ‫أزرﻕ‪/‬ارﺟﻮاﲏ(‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) FM‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﻋﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬ ‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )أﺳﻮد( )ﻋﺪد ‪(8‬‬ ‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ( )ﻋﺪد ‪(8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺪد ‪(2‬‬ ‫اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ )ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬ ‫اﻷﻋﻤﺪة )ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪)(AA‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻣﺮاﻋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻷﻃﺮاﻑ اﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ ‬ﻭاﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﲑة اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﱰﻙ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ اﳊﺮارة أﻭ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻊ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﻱ ﳾء ﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﰲ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻝ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻻﺿﺎءة‪ .‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭث ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ اﺣﺘﲈﻝ اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﴪب ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺘﺄﻛﻞ اﻟﻨﺎﺷﺊ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :1‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﳑﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع )‪ .(‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ‪ 1.0‬إﱃ ‪ 7.0‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭاﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﲈ ﰲ)‪ ،(‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﱰ )‪ ،(‬ﻭﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫إﱃ ‪ 5.0‬ﻣﱰ )‪.(‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﰲ أﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪(R‬‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪(L‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪(R‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪(L‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺧﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭ‪/‬أﻭ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳌﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ارﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )ﻣﺸﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪث ﺑﻘﻊ أﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﰲ اﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺪﱃ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ أﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲠﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﰲ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ )ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﰲ أﺳﻔﻞ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﳌﻮازﻧﺔ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻻﻧﺰﻻﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﻧﺰع اﳊﺸﻴﺎت اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﲥﺎ اﻟﻮرﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﲡﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪ DAV-TZ300‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﲈ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )‪ ،4‬أﲪﺮ‪ /‬أﺑﻴﺾ‪ /‬أزرﻕ‪ /‬رﻣﺎدﻱ(‬ ‫• اﻷﻋﻤﺪة )ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻘﻮاﻋﺪ )ﻋﺪد ‪(4‬‬ ‫• اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻋﺪد ‪(8‬‬ ‫• اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ( )ﻋﺪد ‪(8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ إﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،SPEAKER‬راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.20‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﲈش ﻋﲆ اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻷرﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﳉﺪار )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭاﺛﻨﻪ ﻣﻌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭاﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﻷﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﳍﲈ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻮاﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫• اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﲪﺮ‬ ‫• ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أزرﻕ‬ ‫• ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎع اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ اﱃ اﲡﺎﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﰲ ﳖﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻘﺒﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺒﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻭاﺧﺮﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻑ اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﰲ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﱪﻏﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ اﳉﻬﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﱪﻏﻲ ‪‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻏﻴﲔ )ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻮاﻗﻊ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﻘﻮب اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺜﻘﻮب اﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ .(‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ زﻳﺎدة ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺜﻘﻮب ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ ‬إﱃ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬اﳌﻮﻗﻊ اﻷدﻧﻰ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻏﻴﲔ )ﻣﺰﻭدة‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﳌﺰﻭد‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﲪﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أزرﻕ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ارﺑﻂ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﱃ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﻤﺤﺎذاة اﳉﺰء اﻟﺒﺎرز ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﱪﻏﻴﲔ )أﺳﻮد(‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﳉﺰء اﻟﺒﺎرز‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‬ ‫اﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ اﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳛﺘﺒﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )أﺳﻮد(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﺑﻤﺤﺎذاة اﳉﺰء اﻟﺒﺎرز ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻛﺘﲈﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪:(L‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬ ‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪:(R‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﳊﻤﺮاء‬ ‫أﲪﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪:(R‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺎدﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺰرﻗﺎء‬ ‫أزرﻕ‬ ‫رﻣﺎدﻱ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳊﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﻞ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﺒﻴﻊ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ أﻭ ﺑﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﰲ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎدة اﳊﺎﺋﻂ أﻭ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳚﺐ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮاﻏﻲ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﻮع اﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﻧﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ اﳊﺎﺋﻂ اﳌﺒﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎدة اﳉﺺ ﻫﺶ ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﰲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﳌﻘﻮاة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ اﳊﻮادث أﻭ اﻷﴐار اﻟﻨﺎﲨﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﲑ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ أﻭ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻗﻮﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺑﲈ ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﻜﻔﺎﻳﺔ أﻭ‬ ‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ أﻭ اﻟﻜﻮارث اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳉﺪار‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬أﲪﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ :‬أﺧﴬ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ :(L‬أزرﻕ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪ :(R‬رﻣﺎدﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻀﲑ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺑﺎﳉﺪار‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪DAV-TZ100/DAV-TZ200‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫‪ 145‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪DAV-TZ300‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫‪ 145‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 101.6‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 8‬اﱃ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻘﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﳎﻬﺰة ﺑﻘﺮص اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻷﺧﺮ￯ إﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭاﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﳑﻴﺰاﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ SPEAKER‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ اﳌﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺒﻮب اﳌﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺎزﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻄﺎط( ﰲ أﻃﺮاﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ إﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﱃ أﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻃﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ارﺟﻮاﲏ‬ ‫)ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‬ ‫‪NNA‬‬ ‫أﺧﴬ‬ ‫)اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ(‬ ‫‪ANTE‬‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫‪IAL 75‬‬ ‫‪COAX‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪IN‬‬ ‫‪DIO‬‬ ‫‪TV/ AU‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪OU‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪KER‬‬ ‫‪OFER‬‬ ‫‪SUBWOFOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLY‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪SS-WS‬‬ ‫أزرﻕ‬ ‫)ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪((L‬‬ ‫‪CENTER‬‬ ‫‪FOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLYCT91‬‬ ‫‪SS-‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪SUR‬‬ ‫‪SPEA‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪SUR‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪FRONT‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪SS-TS9‬‬ ‫‪FOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLY‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪FRONT‬‬ ‫أﲪﺮ‬ ‫)اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪((R‬‬ ‫رﻣﺎدﻱ‬ ‫)ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪((R‬‬ ‫أﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫)اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪((L‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ إﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫)–(‬ ‫)‪(+‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻧﺒﻮب ﻣﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ارﺳﺎﻝ اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ إﱃ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬أﺧﱰ أﺳﻠﻮب اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪NNA‬‬ ‫‪ANTE‬‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫‪IAL 75‬‬ ‫‪COAX‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪IN‬‬ ‫‪DIO‬‬ ‫‪TV/ AU‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪OU‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪KER‬‬ ‫‪OFER‬‬ ‫‪SUBWOFOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLY‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪SS-WS‬‬ ‫‪CENTER‬‬ ‫‪FOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLYCT91‬‬ ‫‪SS-‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪SPEA‬‬ ‫‪SUR‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪SUR‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪FRONT‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪SS-TS9‬‬ ‫‪FOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLY‬‬ ‫‪NT R‬‬ ‫‪FRO‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻛﺒﻞ ‪* HDMI‬‬ ‫إﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫إﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ادﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪) DAV-TZ200‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮرة ﻭاﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ ﻭاﻟﻔﻠﺒﲔ ﻭاﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭاﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻭاﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪.DAV-TZ300‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻠﻮب ‪ :1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا ﻫﻮ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﳼ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻠﻮب ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪() *HDMI‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ .HDMI‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﲢﺘﺎج إﱃ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﳋﺮج )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ )‪ PAL‬أﻭ ‪) (NTSC‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ‬ ‫اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮب اﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ‪ PAL‬أﻭ ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺮاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﺸﺮﻕ اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮب اﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪.PAL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OPERATION DIAL‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻜﺲ اﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﺑﲔ ‪ PAL‬ﻭ‪ NTSC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "NTSC‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻋﲆ ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ارﺳﺎﻝ اﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع إﱃ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪NNA‬‬ ‫‪ANTE‬‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫‪IAL 75‬‬ ‫‪COAX‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪IN‬‬ ‫‪DIO‬‬ ‫‪TV/ AU‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪KER‬‬ ‫‪OFER‬‬ ‫‪SUBWOFOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLY‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪SS-WS‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫‪CENTER‬‬ ‫‪FOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLYCT91‬‬ ‫‪SS-‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪SUR‬‬ ‫‪SPEA‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪SUR‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪FRONT‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪SS-TS9‬‬ ‫‪FOR‬‬ ‫‪ONLY‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪FRONT‬‬ ‫إﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪(‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ارﺳﺎﻝ اﺷﺎرة ﺻﻮت اﻧﺎﻟﻮج‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ PlayStation‬إﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪TV/‬‬ ‫‪ (AUDIO IN R/L) VIDEO‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻻﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ :‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(61‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ PlayStation‬إﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪TV/‬‬ ‫‪ (AUDIO IN R/L) VIDEO‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﳎﻬﺰ ﹰا ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ دﺧﻞ ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻛﺎﻵﰐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ ،PlayStation‬اﻟﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ ،PlayStation‬اﻟﺦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻻﺷﺎرة‪:‬‬ ‫اﺧﱰ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﺄﻃﺮاﻑ ﺧﺮج ﺻﻮت‪ /‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ ﳏﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪NNA‬‬ ‫‪ANTE‬‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪IAL 7‬‬ ‫‪COAX‬‬ ‫أﻭ‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،FM‬اﺟﻌﻠﻪ أﻓﻘﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،FM‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ اﳌﺤﻮر ‪ 75‬أﻭﻡ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲠﻮاﺋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪ANTENNA‬‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫‪COAXIAL 75‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﺳﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻹﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻹﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DEMO‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"DEMO ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"DEMO OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﴍاء ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ "‪) "COLD RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،((81‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :3‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ادﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪ /‬إرﺗﻔﺎع‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬ ‫‪4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬ ‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬ ‫‪4:3 PAN SCAN‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻮع‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[16:9‬ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ذﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ أﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ‪ 4:3‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(51‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [4:3 LETTER BOX‬أﻭ ]‪:[4:3 PAN SCAN‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ‪) 4:3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(51‬‬ ‫‪, ‬‬ ‫‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪SD‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬ ‫‪CONTROL FOR HDMI:‬‬ ‫‪VOLUME LIMIT:‬‬ ‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬ ‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ اﱃ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪) "DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(28‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪[Press [ENTER] to run QUICK‬‬ ‫]‪) SETUP.‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ‪ (.‬ﻋﲆ أﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬إذا‬ ‫ﱂ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻻﺧﻄﺎر‪ ،‬اﻋﺪ اﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪) Quick Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ (59‬إﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬إﱃ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ENGLISH‬‬ ‫‪ENGLISH‬‬ ‫‪FRENCH‬‬ ‫‪SPANISH‬‬ ‫‪PORTUGUESE‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫دﻭﻥ ادﺧﺎﻝ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬ ‫‪OSD:‬‬ ‫‪MENU:‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO:‬‬ ‫‪SUBTITLE:‬‬ ‫‪STANDARD‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .Quick Setup‬ﻭﲠﺬا ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻬﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭاﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭج ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﰲ أﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪Quick Setup‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪ ،[SETUP‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫)‪94( 99‬‬ ‫)‪1( 1‬‬ ‫‪0: 01: 08‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪CUSTOM‬‬ ‫‪CUSTOM‬‬ ‫‪QUICK‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[QUICK‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪.Quick Setup‬‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[HDMI SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪،[HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫• ])‪ :[AUTO (1920 × 1080p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج‬ ‫إﺳﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[1920 × 1080i‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.*1920 × 1080i‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[1280 × 720p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.*1280 × 720p‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :**[720 × 480p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.*720 × 480p‬‬ ‫* ‪ :i‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ :p ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫** ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪.[720 × 480/576p‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(21‬اﺧﱰ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،HDMI‬اﺧﱰ ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺻﻮرة ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻛﲈ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻓﻌ ﹰﻼ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﺳﻘﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :4‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﺪر‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫–‪+/‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر –‪ ،FUNCTION +/‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻵﰐ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ "USB"  "TUNER FM"  "DVD‬‬ ‫"‪...  "TV/VIDEO‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫"‪"DVD‬‬ ‫"‪"TUNER FM‬‬ ‫"‪"USB‬‬ ‫"‪"TV/VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ TV/VIDEO‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ :5‬اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﺣﺪ اﻭﺿﺎع ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷﻭﺿﺎع ﲤﻨﺢ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﻭﻧﺸﻂ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺼﻮت ﻣﺴﺎرح اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DEC. MODE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "PRO LOGIC‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮت ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺆﺛﺮات ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ اﺳﺎس أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﲈع‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DEC. MODE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫راﺟﻊ اﳉﺪﻭﻝ أدﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻼﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ اﻟﴩﻭﺣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳉﺪﻭﻝ أدﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﴩح اﳋﻴﺎرات ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت إﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ [SPEAKER FORMATION‬إﱃ‬ ‫]‪) [STANDARD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ "‪ ."A.F.D. STD‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫"‪."A.F.D. MULTI‬‬ ‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫‪"A.F.D. STD" (AUTO‬‬ ‫‪FORMAT DIRECT‬‬ ‫)‪STANDARD‬‬ ‫"‪"A.F.D. MULTI‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺮر اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺻﻮت ﻛﲈ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻔﺮ ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪(AUTO FORMAT‬‬ ‫)‪DIRECT MULTI‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪"PRO LOGIC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪"PLII MOVIE‬‬ ‫"‪"PLII MUSIC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪"2CH STEREO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة إﱃ ﻗﻨﻮات اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻌﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻛﺎة ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻭﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫– اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "PRO LOGIC‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ‪.Dolby Pro Logic‬‬ ‫– اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "PLII MOVIE‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ‪Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "PLII MUSIC‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ‪Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻌﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﴫﻑ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻋﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات‬ ‫اﳌﺼﺪر‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺻﻴﻎ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات إﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫اﺧﱰ "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬أﻭ "‪ "2CH STEREO‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ "‪."DEC. MODE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ادﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮت ﺑﺚ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "PRO LOGIC‬ﻭ "‪ "PLII MOVIE‬ﻭ "‪."PLII MUSIC‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻘﺮاءة اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻻﻏﻨﻴﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ ،"A.F.D. MULTI‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ"‪ "A.F.D. STD‬أﻭ "‪ "PRO LOGIC‬أﻭ ‪"PLII‬‬ ‫"‪ MOVIE‬أﻭ "‪."PLII MUSIC‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﻭ ‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ أﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺪة‪ .‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳚﺐ أﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﲆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪OPERATION DIAL‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ‪VOLUME‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫–‪+/‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )ﻋﺮض ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫–‪ +/‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﻭ ﻗﺮص‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ VOLUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MUTING‬‬ ‫–‪VOLUME +/‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎس ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ ﻋﺪﻡ اﻧﺤﻨﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪STEP‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪،"DVD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫"‪."DVD‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬إﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﰲ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "DEMO‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ "‪"OFF‬‬‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(25‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪) [OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻷﺟﻞ‬ ‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻷﺟﻞ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬أﻭ‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪(1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳚﺎد اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻡ ﺑﻘﺮص اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ OPERATION DIAL‬ﻋﲆ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪(1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪OPERATION‬‬ ‫‪ DIAL‬ﺑﻌﻜﺲ اﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎرب‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪OPERATION‬‬ ‫‪ DIAL‬ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫اﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻭاﺧﺮاج‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.MUTING‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯ أﻭ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ VOLUME +‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫اﳚﺎد ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬اﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ اﻭ اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ ‬اﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﴪﻳﻊ )اﺳﺘﻄﻼع(‪(1‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﱃ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻃﺎر ﺗﻠﻮ اﻻﺧﺮ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪(2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻭاﺣﺪة‬ ‫ﰲ آﻥ ﻭاﺣﺪ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪(5(4(2‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة(‬ ‫‪(3‬‬ ‫‪ ‬أﻭ ‪‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪ (3 ‬اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﴎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﱃ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ STEP‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ STEP‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪ VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﱃ ﴎﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮض اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫)اﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮض ﻓﻮرﻱ( اﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫)اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﻌﺮﻭض ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ 10‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪(6‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮاﻥ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﳌﺪة ﻭﺟﻴﺰة )ﳌﺪة ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ (7‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮرﻱ( اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW/VIDEO CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮرة ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﰲ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD-VR‬‬ ‫‪ (5‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ ،DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (6‬ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/DVD-R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX/MPEG4‬‬ ‫‪ (7‬ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/DVD-R/DVD+RW/‬‬ ‫‪ DVD+R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.DivX/MPEG4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة ﻭاﻟﱰﲨﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻣﻦ زﻭاﻳﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ )زﻭاﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة( ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ زاﻭﻳﺔ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ANGLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺮﲨﺎت ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺴﺐ رﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SUBTITLE‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ DivX‬ﻫﻲ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪ ".divx‬ﻭﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬أﻭ‬ ‫‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (DivX‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة )اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PCM‬أﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬أﻭ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪،(DTS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬أﻭ ‪ CD‬أﻭ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ أﻭ‬ ‫اﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻭاﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﻋﱪ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫]‪ :[STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[1/L‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪ￯ )ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[2/R‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DATA/(DivX‬‬ ‫‪) DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(DivX‬‬ ‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺻﻴﻎ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA‬‬ ‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﰲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬ ‫]‪ :[1: STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.1‬‬ ‫]‪ :[1:1/L‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 1‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[1:2/R‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[2:STEREO‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.2‬‬ ‫]‪ :[2:1/L‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪) 2‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[2:2/R‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪) 2‬ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ‪ 4‬ﺧﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﲑ إﱃ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ‬ ‫»ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (98‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ اﻥ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻎ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ AUDIO‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ PCM‬ﻭ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭ‪ ،DTS‬اﻟﺦ( ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-VR‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD/CD/VIDEO CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪(MP3‬‬ ‫‪) DATA DVD/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(MP3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﻧﻮاع ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [1: MAIN‬ﺻﻮت رﺋﻴﴘ(‬ ‫• ]‪) [1: SUB‬ﺻﻮت ﻓﺮﻋﻲ(‬ ‫• ]‪) [1: MAIN+SUB‬ﺻﻮت رﺋﻴﴘ ﻭﻓﺮﻋﻲ(‬ ‫• ]‪[2: MAIN‬‬ ‫• ]‪[2: SUB‬‬ ‫• ]‪[2: MAIN+SUB‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪5.1‬‬ ‫‪LFE‬‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )‪(L/R‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬ ‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 .1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪LS‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪(L/R‬‬ ‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL 2 / 1‬‬ ‫‪1:SPANISH‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MULTI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[2CH‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super‬‬ ‫‪ Audio CD‬ﻫﺠﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ .CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﻤﻮع ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA‬‬ ‫‪) DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪128k‬‬ ‫‪1:MP3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[SUPER AUDIO‬‬ ‫]‪ ،CD/CD LAYER‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪.[SUPER AUDIO CD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﳐﺘﺎرة‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CD‬ﳐﺘﺎرة ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[MULTI/2CH‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻮت ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪3‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﻤﻮع ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MULTI/2CH‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪+ (L/R‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫‪LFE‬‬ ‫‪RS‬‬ ‫‪1: ENGLISH‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪.[CD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[SUPER AUDIO CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪.Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio‬‬ ‫‪ ،CD‬ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "SA-CD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[CD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ‬ ‫"‪ "CD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪) PBC‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪(2.0‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻌﺮض ‪(PBC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪) Playback Control) PBC‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة((‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ ،PBC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪ CD‬ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪.PBC‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺧﱰ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻡ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎرﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا اﺧﻄﺄت‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ اﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Press ENTER‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫زر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ‪ (ENTER‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 3‬ﻛﻤﺆﴍ ]‪[Press SELECT‬‬ ‫)اﺿﻐﻂ زر اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪ (SELECT‬ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،PBC‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ‬أﻭ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ اﻭﺿﺎع اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة أﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﲣﺮج اﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ ،PBC‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ زر اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ‬ ‫"‪) "RESUME‬اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ( ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﳌﺎ‬ ‫أﻧﻚ ﱂ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "RESUME‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻥ اﻟﺬﻱ أﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد )أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬‫‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ أﻭ اﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﲢﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪.FUNCTION +/‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺨﺼﻮص أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-VR‬ﻭ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭ‪Super Audio‬‬ ‫‪ CD‬ﻭ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪ DATA CD‬ﻭ‪ ،DATA DVD‬ﺳﻴﺘﺬﻛﺮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة(‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﺘﻬﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻣﺮة ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ اﳌﺮة اﻟﻘﺎدﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ادﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ذاﻛﺮة اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻭﻝ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ‪[MULTI-DISC‬‬ ‫]‪ RESUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ .[ON‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫راﺟﻊ»]‪) [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(«)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ‬ ‫‪ 10‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪99‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎر ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[PROGRAM‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[SET ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[PROGRAM‬‬ ‫اﳌﺪة اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0: 00:00‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫––‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪PROGRAM‬‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬ ‫‪1. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪2. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪3. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪4. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪5. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪6. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪7. TRACK‬‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ اﳌﺆﴍ اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ اﱃ ﺻﻒ اﳌﺴﺎرات ]‪) [T‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.([01] ،‬‬ ‫‪0: 00:00‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫––‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪PROGRAM‬‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬ ‫‪1. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪2. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪3. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪4. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪5. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪6. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪7. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺑﺮﳎﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪.[02‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪ [02‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﲢﺖ‬ ‫اﳊﺮﻑ ]‪ ،[T‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬ ‫‪0: 03:51‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫––‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪ALL CLEAR‬‬ ‫‪1. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪2. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪3. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪4. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪5. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪6. TRACK‬‬ ‫‪7. TRACK‬‬ ‫اﳌﺪة اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﺴﺎرات أﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮار اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪4‬‬ ‫اﱃ‪.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﺪء ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ ]‪ [ON‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 3‬ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ إﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ أﻭ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ » ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ«‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ أﻭ إﻟﻐﺎءﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 5‬ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﱪﳎﺔ اﳉﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺬﻑ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.CLEAR‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‪ [--‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﲢﺖ اﳊﺮﻑ ]‪ ،[T‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ » ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ«‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[ALL CLEAR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪PROGRAM‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدﻱ اﱃ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SHUFFLE‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[SHUFFLE‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬‬ ‫‪) DATA DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ])‪ : [ON (MUSIC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻻﻭﻝ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫• ]‪ :[DISC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،CLEAR‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭ‪ Super VCD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.PBC‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‬ ‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[REPEAT‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪.[REPEAT‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[DISC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[TITLE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[CHAPTER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻭﺿﺎع اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺸﱰﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر(‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[DISC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [TRACK‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [FILE‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭ‪ Super VCD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.PBC‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ زﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﲈ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‪ /‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD TOP MENU‬أﻭ ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ أﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[DISC MENU‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[DISC MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [MENU‬أﻭ ‪[TOP‬‬ ‫]‪.MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪.[ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[PLAY LIST‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت ﺣﺴﺒﲈ‬ ‫ﻣﺪرﺟﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ORIGINAL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ أﺻ ﹰﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫]‪[ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-VR‬اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﱃ اﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﺼﻮر أﻭ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ اﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫إﺳﻢ "‪ ."titles‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪.DVD TOP MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻭاﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ أﻭ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ‬ ‫اﳌﺤﺮر ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-VR‬‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ أﻭ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD/CD/DATA‬‬ ‫‪ CD/DATA DVD‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﳌﺴﺎر أﻭ اﻟﻔﻬﺮس أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ أرﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎت ﻭاﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﻒ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪) .‬إذا ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ إﱃ ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪[CHAPTER] :‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ ])**( **[ )ﻳﺸﲑ ** اﱃ رﻗﻢ(‪ .‬ﻳﺸﲑ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﲔ اﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ اﱃ اﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﻜﲇ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎت‬ ‫أﻭ اﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎرات أﻭ اﻟﻔﻬﺎرس أﻭ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أﻭ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫) ‪98 ( 9 9‬‬ ‫) ‪13 ( 9 9‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪0: 03: 17‬‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﳌﺆﴍ ]**‪ [T **:**:‬اﱃ ]‪.[T --:--:--‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﳚﺎد ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﰲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﲔ ﻭ ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 0 ،2 ،0 ،1 ،2‬أﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫)]‪.([2:10:20‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD+RW‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﳌﺆﴍ ])**( **[ اﱃ ])**( ‪.[--‬‬ ‫) ‪98 ( 9 9‬‬ ‫)‪13( 99‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪0: 03: 17‬‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ أزرار اﻻرﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﳌﺼﻨﻒ‪ ،‬اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‪ ،‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪،‬‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫اذا اﺧﻄﺄت‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-‬‬ ‫‪ (R/DVD-RW‬أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD/Super Audio‬‬ ‫‪ (CD/CD‬أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(( ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ ،2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪[TIME‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ ]**‪) [T **:**:‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[MUSIC‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .DVD MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪ ،[MUSIC‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[MUSIC‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.*DCF‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬ ‫* "‪) "Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا(‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪Japan‬‬ ‫)‪Let's Talk About Love (1985‬‬ ‫)‪1st Album (1986‬‬ ‫)‪In the Middle of Nowhere (1986‬‬ ‫)‪Ready for Romance (1986‬‬ ‫)‪In the Garden of Venus (1987‬‬ ‫)‪Romantic Warriors (1987‬‬ ‫)‪Back for Good (1988‬‬ ‫)‪Alone (1999‬‬ ‫‪Electronics and Information Technology Industries‬‬ ‫‪.(JEITA) Association‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".mp3‬أﻭ "‪".jpg‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫أﻭ "‪ ".jpeg‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ‪ .JPEG‬اﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ﺣﺪﻭث ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺑﺼﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫أﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3PRO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 200‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻱ‬ ‫ﳎﻠﺪات رﻗﻤﻬﺎ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪) .200‬ﻭﻗﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﻋﺪد‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﱃ ﳎﻠﺪ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫)ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪8‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 8‬ارﺗﻔﺎع((‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪:JPEG‬‬ ‫– اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪) ".mp3‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ (MP3‬أﻭ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪) ".jpeg"/".jpg‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪.(JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TRACK LIST‬‬ ‫‪03 In the Middle of Nowher...‬‬ ‫‪01_Geronimo_s_Cadillac‬‬ ‫‪02_Riding_On_A_White_Swan‬‬ ‫‪03_Give_Me_Peace_On_Earth‬‬ ‫‪04_Sweet_Little_Shella‬‬ ‫‪05_Ten_Thousand_Lonely_Drums‬‬ ‫‪06_Lonely_Tears_In_Chinatown‬‬ ‫‪07_In_Shaire‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎراﳌﺴﺎر ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺧﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .DVD MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD MENU‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻣﺮة ﻭاﺣﺪة‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ إﱃ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺰر‪ ‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ آﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ –‪. +/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮ￯« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮر ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(43‬ﻭاﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮات‬ ‫إﱃ ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻃﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.PICTURE NAVI‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻃﺎرات ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﰲ ‪ 16‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬اﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Happy birthday‬‬ ‫‪Travelling 01‬‬ ‫‪2003.08.20‬‬ ‫‪Flowers‬‬ ‫‪Travelling 02‬‬ ‫‪Animals‬‬ ‫‪2003.11.16‬‬ ‫‪2003.12.03‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .DVD MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪ ،[PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[PHOTO‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫اﳌﺮاد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﲥﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫‪.RETURN‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ آﺧﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬اﻃﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﴍاﺋﺢ ﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮ￯« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ أﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA‬‬ ‫‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪) . DISPLAY‬إذا ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ إﱃ ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪(.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[INTERVAL‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﻜﺒﲑة‬ ‫اﳊﺠﻢ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬا ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ أﻭ أﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﻇﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ –‪. +/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD MENU‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[JPEG‬‬ ‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ﻋﲆ ]‪[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫‪ .MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎدات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ ‪90‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ]‪.[INTERVAL‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ اﳌﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FAST‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[NORMAL‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[NORMAL‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﱰة اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[SLOW 1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻗﺖ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﳋﻴﺎر اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3,000,000‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ أﻭ‬ ‫أﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪.‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪) . DISPLAY‬إذا ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ إﱃ ]‪ ،[MUSIC/PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪[EFFECT‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪.[EFFECT‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 1‬ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺪرﳚﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ أﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﱃ أﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺎر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﱃ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 4‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﺣﺪ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 5‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MUSIC/PHOTO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MUSIC‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[VIDEO‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[PHOTO‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ .JPEG‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻛﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ ،[MEDIA‬راﺟﻊ »أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(97‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[BROWSING‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪[JPEG‬‬ ‫‪ 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ /MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ × ‪[(1920‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[BROWSING‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER LIST‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 6‬ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ (41‬أﻭ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ«‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [PICTURE LIST‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 6‬ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬ﻭ‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD‬‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬‬ ‫أﻭ ‪ Joliet‬ﻭاﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.(UDF) Universal Disk Format‬‬ ‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻼت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﻨﺒﺎﻩ إﱃ أﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻏﲑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ اﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫أﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 200‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭﰲ ﻛﻞ ﳎﻠﺪ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG4‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪،MP4‬‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ "‪ .".m4v‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ‬ ‫"‪ ".m4v‬اذا ﱂ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.MPEG4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ‪ /‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ MPEG4‬ﻭأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.Packet Write‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪،DivX‬‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪ .".divx‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪".divx‬‬ ‫اذا ﱂ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.MPEG4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪ DivX‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ .DivX, Inc.‬ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﺎدﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ DivX® Certified‬ﺑﺼﻮرة رﺳﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DATA CD‬ﻭ‪ DATA DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪.DivX‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬اﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ أﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻭاﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ أﻱ ﻣﻦ اﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻇﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺸﻮﻫ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻮﴅ ﲠﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ (Windows Media Audio) WMA‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻈﻬﻮر اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ ،‬ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪. DivX‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[VIDEO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪ ،[VIDEO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[VIDEO‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﻣﺰج اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﻲ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺠﻤﻪ أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ‪720‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 576‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( أﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬ ‫‪SUMMER 2003‬‬ ‫‪NEW YEAR'S DAY‬‬ ‫‪MY FAVOURITES‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ«‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬اﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ أﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻷﻭﻝ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض أﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ –‪. +/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮ￯« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 6‬اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ«‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FILE LIST‬‬ ‫‪MY FAVOURITES‬‬ ‫‪HAWAII 2004‬‬ ‫‪VENUS‬‬ ‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪد ﻣﺮات اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﺪد ﻣﺮات اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[BROWSING‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[BROWSING‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[FOLDER LIST‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 6‬ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ«‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(45‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫]‪[A/V SYNC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[A/V SYNC‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺠﺐ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﻭ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﳍﺎ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻮد اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﺎج اﱃ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻘﻴﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫]‪.[A/V SYNC‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺪﻓﻖ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻏﲑ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[SYSTEM SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫]‪ ،[PARENTAL CONTROL ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫إذا ﱂ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻚ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫‪Enter a new 4-digit password,‬‬ ‫‪then press ENTER .‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL‬ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ]‪ [LEVEL‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.11‬‬ ‫إذا ﺳﺒﻖ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت أﻭ أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار‬ ‫اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺖ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ‪[PARENTAL‬‬ ‫]‪ CONTROL‬ﳍﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ادﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪USA‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪LEVEL:‬‬ ‫‪STANDARD:‬‬ ‫‪CHANGE PASSWORD:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[STANDARD‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳉﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ]‪ ،[LEVEL‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻨﻮد اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[STANDARD‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[OTHERS ‬اﺧﱰ رﻣﺰ ﹰا ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫»ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ (98‬ﻭادﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮار‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬اﱃ ‪ 6‬اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ »ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .(47‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "199703‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ أﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ ادﺧﺎﻝ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬ ‫اﳉﺪﻳﺪة اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻨﻮد اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ]‪.[LEVEL‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ‪[PARENTAL‬‬ ‫]‪.CONTROL‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ أﺻﺒﺤﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﲈ أﺻﺒﺤﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻮد أﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪،[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫]‪ ،[PARENTAL CONTROL ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‬ ‫]‪ ،[CHANGE PASSWORD ‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة رﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ارﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ إدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]‪) [LANGUAGE SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬ ‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ]‪) [VIDEO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬ ‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫]‪) [HDMI SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬ ‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪) [AUDIO SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬ ‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ]‪) [SYSTEM SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬ ‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪) [SPEAKER SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪[VIDEO SETUP] :‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬ ‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬ ‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬ ‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ]‪[TV TYPE‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪4:3 LETTERFULL‬‬ ‫‪BOX‬‬ ‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪4:3 PAN SCAN‬‬ ‫اﳋﻴﺎرات‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪[4:3 LETTER BOX] :‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬ ‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬ ‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ ،[SETUP‬راﺟﻊ »إﻋﺎدة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [SETUP‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫]‪[LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻭ ﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫]‪) [MENU‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [AUDIO‬اﻟﺼﻮت( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫]‪ ،[ORIGINAL‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳍﺎ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [SUBTITLE‬اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ENGLISH‬‬ ‫‪ENGLISH‬‬ ‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO FOLLOW‬‬ ‫]‪) [OSD‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬ ‫‪OSD:‬‬ ‫‪MENU:‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO:‬‬ ‫‪SUBTITLE:‬‬ ‫‪ VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[AUDIO FOLLOW‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﲈر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﰲ ]‪ [MENU‬أﻭ ]‪ [AUDIO‬أﻭ ]‪ ،[SUBTITLE‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺣﺪ￯‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [OTHERS ‬ﰲ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻭ]‪[AUDIO‬‬ ‫ﻭ]‪ ،[SUBTITLE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭإدﺧﺎﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ »ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (98‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫]‪[VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪TV TYPE:‬‬ ‫‪COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD):‬‬ ‫‪PAUSE MODE:‬‬ ‫]‪)[TV TYPE‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬إرﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[16:9‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد )ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﳋﺮج‬ ‫اﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻏﲑ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﺷﺎرة ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺳﻮداء ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫]‪ :[4:3 LETTER BOX‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﻋﲆ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [BLACK LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺴﻮاد(‬ ‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭأﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫]‪) [PAUSE MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ( )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[4:3 PAN SCAN‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭاﻗﺘﻄﺎع اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﻫﺪاﻑ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻮرة دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ إﺷﺎرات‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[FRAME‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ‬ ‫اﻷﻫﺪاﻑ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻮرة دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[4:3 LETTER BOX‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [4:3 PAN SCAN‬أﻭ اﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫])‪[COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫)اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ‬ ‫اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮب اﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫)‪AUTO(1920x1080p‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪LEVEL2‬‬ ‫‪YCBCR‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪SD‬‬ ‫‪HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫‪HDMI RESOLUTION:‬‬ ‫‪CONTROL FOR HDMI:‬‬ ‫‪VOLUME LIMIT:‬‬ ‫‪YCBCR/RGB(HDMI):‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO(HDMI):‬‬ ‫‪JPEG RESOLUTION:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PAL‬أﻭ ‪ .NTSC‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،DUAL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫]‪.[AUTO‬‬ ‫]‪ :[PAL‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ NTSC‬ﻭإﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.PAL‬‬ ‫]‪ :[NTSC‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ PAL‬ﻭإﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ اﳋﺎص ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫]‪[HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‪ .HDMI OUT‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪«HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫])‪ :[AUTO (1920 × 1080p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[1920 × 1080i‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.*1920 × 1080i‬‬ ‫]‪ :[1280 × 720p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.*1280 × 720p‬‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫]‪ :**[720 × 480p‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.*720 × 480p‬‬ ‫* ‪ :i‬اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ :p ،‬اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫** ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪.[720 × 480/576p‬‬ ‫]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬ ‫])‪[AUDIO (HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫‪.HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪.OUT‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ ‪ DTS‬أﻭ ‪ PCM‬ﺑـ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 24/‬ﺑﺖ اﱃ اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪ PCM‬ﺑـ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 16/‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪) «"BRAVIA" Sync‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫]‪[VOLUME LIMIT‬‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ أﺳﻠﻮب ﺧﺮج اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )أﻭ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ،(THEATRE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (60‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﺎدﻱ ﻫﺬا ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[LEVEL3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ‪.10‬‬ ‫]‪ :[LEVEL2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ‪.15‬‬ ‫]‪ :[LEVEL1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ‪.20‬‬ ‫]‪:[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬ ‫])‪[YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة ‪ HDMI‬اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪.OUT‬‬ ‫]‪ :[YCBCR‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪.YCBCR‬‬ ‫]‪ :[RGB‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪.RGB‬‬ ‫]‪[JPEG RESOLUTION‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫] ‪ :[SD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ﻣﻊ اﻻﻃﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :[HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪HD‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻻﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫اﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫] ‪ :[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻹﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ إﻃﺎر أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [JPEG RESOLUTION‬ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[TV‬‬ ‫]‪ TYPE‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [VIDEO SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫]‪ [16:9‬ﻭ]‪ [HDMI RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪[HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [YCBCR‬ﻋﲆ‬ ‫]‪.[RGB‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫‪ ،DVI‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ]‪ [RGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫]‪.[YCBCR‬‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [ON‬ﳐﺘﺎر ﹰا‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ]‪[AUDIO DRC‬‬ ‫ﻭ]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻭ‪ DYNAMIC BASS‬ﻭ"‪ "DEC. MODE‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ أﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "DVD‬أﻭ‬ ‫"‪ ،"USB‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫]‪.[ON‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [720 × 480p‬أﻭ‬ ‫]‪.[720 × 480/576p‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ] ‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ‬ ‫]‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬ ‫ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬إﱃ ]‪.[1920 × 1080i‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﺷﺎرة ‪ HDMI‬ﳊﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﻭ إﺧﺮاج أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬أﻭ ‪DATA‬‬‫‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫]‪[AUDIO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION:‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO DRC:‬‬ ‫‪TRACK SELECTION:‬‬ ‫]‪) [AUDIO DRC‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫]‪[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫‪SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪SCREEN SAVER:‬‬ ‫‪JACKET PICTURE‬‬ ‫‪BACKGROUND:‬‬ ‫‪PARENTAL CONTROL:‬‬ ‫‪Registration Code‬‬ ‫‪DivX:‬‬ ‫‪MULTI-DISC RESUME:‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫‪RESET:‬‬ ‫]‪[SCREEN SAVER‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ اﳌﺪ￯ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫]‪ [AUDIO DRC‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﰲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻌﺮض )ﻇﻬﻮر اﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫اﳌﺰﻭدة ﻟﻠﺼﻮر(‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ أﻱ زر )‪ ،‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ( ﻻﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ أﻱ ﻣﺪ￯ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[STANDARD‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﺪ￯ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺪﻩ ﻣﻬﻨﺪس اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[MAX‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺪ￯ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إذا ﱂ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳌﺪة ‪ 15‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [AUDIO DRC‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [TRACK SELECTION‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ أﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻋﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻎ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة )‪ PCM‬أﻭ ‪ DTS‬أﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.(MPEG‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫أﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PCM‬ﻭ‪ DTS‬ﻭﺻﻮت دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ PCM‬ﻭ‪ DTS‬ﻭﺻﻮت دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫‪ Digital‬ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MPEG‬ﲠﺬا اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[BACKGROUND‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻮﻥ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أﻭ ﺻﻮرة اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﳌﻮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[JACKET PICTURE‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼﻑ )ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )‪ ،CD-EXTRA‬اﻟﺦ(‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة ]‪.[GRAPHICS‬‬ ‫]‪ :[GRAPHICS‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[BLUE‬ﻟﻮﻥ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أزرﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[BLACK‬ﻟﻮﻥ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ أﺳﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻮد اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬ ‫»ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(47‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر ‪[TRACK‬‬ ‫]‪ SELECTION‬ﻋﲆ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪ [AUDIO‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻓﯽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]‪) [LANGUAGE SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) .(50‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫]‪[FRONT‬‬ ‫]‪[DivX‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳋﺎص ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ زﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻻﻧﱰﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪.http://www.divx.com‬‬ ‫]‪) [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/‬‬ ‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫]‪ [MULTI-DISC RESUME‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﳌﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 10‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻻﺳﻨﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[RESET‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻷﺧﺮ￯ ]‪ [SETUP‬ﻏﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ رﻗﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ]‪ [PARENTAL CONTROL‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [SETUP‬اﱃ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫]‪[SPEAKER SETUP‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮت إﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﲥﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻭﺗﻮازﻥ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫‪YES‬‬ ‫‪YES‬‬ ‫‪YES‬‬ ‫‪YES‬‬ ‫‪SPEAKER SETUP‬‬ ‫‪CONNECTION:‬‬ ‫‪DISTANCE:‬‬ ‫‪LEVEL(FRONT):‬‬ ‫‪LEVEL(SURROUND):‬‬ ‫‪TEST TONE‬‬ ‫‪FRONT:‬‬ ‫‪CENTER:‬‬ ‫‪SURROUND:‬‬ ‫‪SUBWOOFER:‬‬ ‫]‪[YES‬‬ ‫]‪[CENTER‬‬ ‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﺎدة‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[NONE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SURROUND‬‬ ‫]‪ :[YES‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﺎدة‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[NONE‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SUBWOOFER‬‬ ‫]‪[YES‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ]‪ ،[CONNECTION‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ]‪ [STANDARD‬اﳋﺎص ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫]‪ ،[SPEAKER FORMATION‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪ [SPEAKER FORMATION‬اﱃ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ]‪.[STANDARD‬‬ ‫]‪[DISTANCE‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻐﲑات اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ )‪ (‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع إﱃ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺘﻐﲑات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1.0‬إﱃ ‪ 7.0‬ﻣﱰ‪ (1‬ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 0.0‬إﱃ ‪ 7.0‬ﻣﱰ‪ (2‬ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫]‪) [CONNECTION‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ(‬ ‫إذا ﱂ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ أﻭ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪[CENTER‬‬ ‫ﻭ]‪ .[SURROUND‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫]‪ :(33.0 m [FRONT‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :(4(33.0 m [CENTER‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )ﳌﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﱰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :(5(33.0 m [SURROUND‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 5.0‬اﻣﺘﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• إذا ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻗﺮب‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ [DISTANCE‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫])‪) [LEVEL (FRONT‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮت )اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ((‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ – 6.0‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ إﱃ ‪ 0‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ ]‪،[L/R‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ – 6.0‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ إﱃ ‪ + 6.0‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ ]‪[CENTER‬‬ ‫ﻭ]‪ .[SUBWOOFER‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ‬ ‫]‪ [ON‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :0.0 dB [L/R‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :*0.0 dB [CENTER‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :+2.0 dB [SUBWOOFER‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﳎﻬﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ])‪ [LEVEL (FRONT‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ])‪.[LEVEL (SURROUND‬‬ ‫]‪ : [OFF‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻮاﱄ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮد ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ]‪ ،[SPEAKER SETUP‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﺎﻵﰐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ 0.9 (1‬إﱃ ‪ 6.9‬ﻣﱰ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 0.0 (2‬إﱃ ‪ 6.9‬ﻣﱰ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪) Quick Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(26‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [CENTER‬إﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﰲ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬ ‫‪ (5‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [SURROUND‬إﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬ ‫]‪) [TEST TONE‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ(‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪.[ON‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا اﱃ اﻥ ﲣﺘﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬اﱃ‪. 3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻣﻌ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮص‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ VOLUME‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﻭ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ VOLUME +/‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ .CLEAR‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ اﱃ اﻥ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[CONNECTION‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻮد اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [CENTER‬اﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬ ‫])‪) [LEVEL (SURROUND‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫)ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ((‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ – 6.0‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ إﱃ ‪ + 6.0‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [TEST TONE‬اﱃ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ :*0.0 dB [L/R‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬ ‫اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [SURROUND‬اﱃ ]‪ [YES‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[CONNECTION‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ 20‬ﳏﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ .FM‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﳊﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪FM‬‬ ‫‪FM 10 : 88.00 MHz‬‬ ‫‪SONY RADIO‬‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "TUNER FM‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر –‪ TUNING +/‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ اﱃ اﻥ ﺗﺒﺪأ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "TUNED‬ﻭ "‪) "ST‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ( ﰲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫"‪ "MEMORY‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ اﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ﻭذﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬إﱃ ‪ 7‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳏﻄﺎت أﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪) "COMPLETE‬اﻛﺘﲈﻝ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ( ﰲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﱰ رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫–‪) PRESET +/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(57‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻻﺟﺮاء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ )راﺟﻊ»ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.((56‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ PRESET +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ آﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﳏﻄﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‬ ‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫–‪.VOLUME +/‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﳏﻄﺎت رادﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ TUNING +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر –‪ TUNING +/‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳏﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫–‪ TUNING +/‬أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺮدداﲥﺎ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ D.TUNING‬ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ ،2‬اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﱰددات‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ ،‬أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺸﻮﺷ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺸﻮﺷ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺚ ﻏﲑ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪ ،‬إﻻ أﻥ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺤﺴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "FM MODE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﴍ "‪."MONO‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"STEREO‬اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"MONO‬اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "TUNER FM‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷﺳﲈء )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ("ABC" ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎﻝ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ إﺳﻢ ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﳏﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "TUNER FM‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ آﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ PRESET +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء إﺳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس اﳋﺎص ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫"‪ "NAME IN‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﻹﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أزرار اﳌﺆﴍ اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳊﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﳌﺆﴍ اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻙ اﱃ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﳊﺮﻭﻑ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭرﻣﻮز أﺧﺮ￯ ﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫إذا ارﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ اﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳊﺮﻑ‬ ‫اﳌﺮاد إﻟﻐﺎءﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳊﺮﻑ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﳊﺮﻑ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ‬ ‫اﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳊﺮﻑ اﳌﺮاد ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.CLEAR‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "COMPLETE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ أﻭ اﻟﱰدد ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪،"TUNER FM‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﱰدد اﳌﻌﺮﻭض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،DISPLAY‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪...   ...   ‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"SONY RADIO‬‬ ‫‪ ‬اﻟﱰدد‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"FM1 87.50‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ "‪"FM MODE‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ "‪"STEREO‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط‬ ‫‪ ‬اﻟﱰدد‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ "‪"FM1 87.50‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ "‪"FM MODE‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ "‪"STEREO‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/ HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ‬ ‫‪"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬ ‫‪ -‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬ ‫ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬‫‪ -‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬ ‫‪ -‬اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻠﻐﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺸﱰﻛﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪(Consumer Electronics Control) CEC‬‬ ‫ﻷﺟﻞ ‪.(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﰲ اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ -‬اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ - HDMI‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪- HDMI‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ - HDMI‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ - HDMI‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إدﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫اﻹﺷﺎرات ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻷزرار اﳌﻔﻴﺪة ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ THEATRE‬أﻭ ‪ONE-‬‬ ‫‪ TOUCH PLAY‬أﻭ ‪ .TV ‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬ ‫»اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (75‬ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TV‬‬ ‫‪ONE-TOUCH‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ إﱃ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪THEATRE‬‬ ‫‪BRAVIA Sync‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ "BRAVIA" Sync‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪Sony‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ .HDMI‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ‪ ،Sony‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[HDMI SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[CONTROL FOR‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح(‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﴪح‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺠﻮدة ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.THEATRE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ زر ﻭاﺣﺪ‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،ONE-TOUCH PLAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫إﺷﺎرات اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬إذا‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ اﱃ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪.HDMI ."DVD‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﳛﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰاﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ زر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ POWER‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ اﻟﺰر ‪ TV ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ "‪ "DVD‬أﻭ "‪ "TV/VIDEO‬أﻭ "‪ "USB‬أﻭ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،(CD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت‬ ‫‪.(22 ،21‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪ ."TV/VIDEO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺎدر ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ اﳊﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬ ‫• أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) PAP‬ﺻﻮرة ﻭﺻﻮرة(‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭج اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،PAP‬ﺗﻌﻮد ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺧﺮاج‬ ‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺨﺘﺎرة ﻗﺒﻞ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.PAP‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﺎﲏ إﱃ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪،USB‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫)ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ أﺳﻠﻮب ﺧﺮج اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﱃ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )أﻭ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪،(THEATRE‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﺎدﻱ ﻫﺬا ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ "]‪"[VOLUME LIMIT‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫)اﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3/WMA/‬‬ ‫‪ /(AAC‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ /JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ (DivX/MPEG4‬اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﲢﺰﻳﻦ ‪) USB‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻭذﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬إﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪،‬‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ« )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻎ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ *MP3/WMA/AAC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ )‪Digital‬‬ ‫‪.(Rights Management‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ WMA/AAC‬ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪.DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻏﲑ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ﻏﲑ اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﲈﻥ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ داﺋ ﹰﲈ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض أﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﺣﺘﲈﻝ ﺿﺌﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ اﻟﺰاﺋﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭأﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬أﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز‪ .‬ﻭاﻻ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬إﱃ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ®‪ Walkman‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ®‪ Walkman‬إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "‪ "Creating Library‬أﻭ‬ ‫"‪ "Creating Database‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ®‪.Walkman‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ®‪ Walkman‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫"‪ ،"Media Manager for WALKMAN‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .MP3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ®‪.Walkman‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪ ،"TV/VIDEO‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ‬ ‫"‪ "DVD‬أﻭ "‪ ،"USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ أﻳﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ "‪"TV/VIDEO‬‬ ‫أﻭ "‪ "DVD‬أﻭ "‪ ،"USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪WMA‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪AAC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "USB‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫أﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ (USB‬ﻋﲆ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ )‪.(USB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻈﻞ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة‬ ‫"‪ "READING‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻘﻮة‪ ،‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆدﻱ ذﻟﻚ اﱃ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض اﳉﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﻳﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة أﻭ أﺷﻴﺎء ﻏﲑ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻈﻬﻮر اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪"READING‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮاءة ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰع اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺰع اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 200‬ﳎﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت )اﳌﻠﻔﺎت( اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮت‬ ‫أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮرة ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 200‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫"‪".mp3‬‬ ‫"‪".wma‬‬ ‫"‪".m4a‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫"‪ ".jpg‬أﻭ "‪".jpeg‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪MPEG4‬‬ ‫"‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ "‪".m4v‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫"‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪".divx‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض أﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﲢﻤﻞ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ أﻋﻼﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/‬‬ ‫‪ .DivX/MPEG4‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدﻱ ﺗﺸﻴﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﱃ‬ ‫إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت ﺟﻬﲑ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ ﰲ اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ إﺿﺎﻓﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺒﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﳍﺮﻣﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻘﺪة‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﳎﻠﺪ آﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭذﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻤﻘﻬﺎ ‪ 8‬ﳎﻠﺪات‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬إذا ﻭﺟﺪت ﳎﻠﺪات أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫ﻛﺜﲑة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻃﻮﻳ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻹﳖﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺮاءة اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﱪ ﳏﻮر‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﻼت ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﳛﺪث ﺗﺄﺧﲑ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ USB‬اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺤﺪد ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺤﺪد ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ داﺋ ﹰﲈ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺰع اﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ .USB‬ﻧﺰع اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫)‪Let's Talk About Love (1985‬‬ ‫)‪1st Album (1986‬‬ ‫)‪In the Middle of Nowhere (1986‬‬ ‫)‪Ready for Romance (1986‬‬ ‫)‪In the Garden of Venus (1987‬‬ ‫)‪Romantic Warriors (1987‬‬ ‫)‪Back for Good (1988‬‬ ‫)‪Alone (1999‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪01_Geronimo_s_Cadillac‬‬ ‫‪02_Riding_On_A_White_Swan‬‬ ‫‪03_Give_Me_Peace_On_Earth‬‬ ‫‪04_Sweet_Little_Shella‬‬ ‫‪05_Ten_Thousand_Lonely_Drums‬‬ ‫‪06_Lonely_Tears_In_Chinatown‬‬ ‫‪07_In_Shaire‬‬ ‫)‪.(USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪TRACK LIST‬‬ ‫‪03 In the Middle of Nowher...‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ"‪ "USB‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪ .MENU‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪ MENU‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[MUSIC‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .DVD MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪ ،[MUSIC‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[MUSIC‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ أﻧﻮاع اﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت أﻭ ﳎﻠﺪات ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﴐﻭرﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ‪ /‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3/WMA/AAC‬ﻭأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻏﲑ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﳛﺪث اﻧﻘﻄﺎع ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻃﻼﻗ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ‪ /‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻭأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮة ﺑﻔﲑﻭس ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﳎﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. /‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻣﺮة ﻭاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻹﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ إﱃ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ آﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮ￯« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "USB‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﰲ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫)‪.(USB‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬ ‫ﻭإﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﱃ ﴎاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻃﺎر اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.PICTURE NAVI‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻃﺎرات ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﰲ ‪ 16‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.DVD MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪ ،[PHOTO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[PHOTO‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪. +/-‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Happy birthday‬‬ ‫‪Travelling 01‬‬ ‫‪2003.08.20‬‬ ‫‪Flowers‬‬ ‫‪Travelling 02‬‬ ‫‪Animals‬‬ ‫‪2003.11.16‬‬ ‫‪2003.12.03‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫اﳌﺮاد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﲥﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة‬ ‫اﱃ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫‪.RETURN‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭاﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎدات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ ‪90‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ اﳋﻴﺎر اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪3,000,000‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﻷﺟﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[JPEG‬‬ ‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫] ‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ﻋﲆ ]‪.[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[EFFECT‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬اﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ –‪. +/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮ￯« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺪة اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[INTERVAL‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[NORMAL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﱃ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FAST‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺪة ﻋﲆ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫]‪.[NORMAL‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺪة ﻋﲆ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[NORMAL‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[SLOW 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺪة ﻋﲆ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[SLOW 1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[EFFECT‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 1‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ أﻋﲆ اﱃ‬ ‫أﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺎر اﱃ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 3‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 4‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﻇﻬﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MODE 5‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[INTERVAL‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪[JPEG‬‬ ‫]‪ RESOLUTION‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪ [(1920 × 1080i) HD‬أﻭ ﻋﲆ ]‪[(1920 × 1080i) HD‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "USB‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫)‪.(USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[VIDEO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻴﺎر ﻏﲑ ]‪ ،[VIDEO‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[VIDEO‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FOLDER LIST‬‬ ‫‪SUMMER 2003‬‬ ‫‪NEW YEAR'S DAY‬‬ ‫‪MY FAVOURITES‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻣﺮة ﻭاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ إﱃ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ إﱃ اﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ آﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻌﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬اﺧﱰ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. RETURN‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DVD MENU‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﳎﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮض اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﳎﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FILE LIST‬‬ ‫‪MY FAVOURITES‬‬ ‫‪HAWAII 2004‬‬ ‫‪VENUS‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻃﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .DVD MENU‬اﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪ DVD MENU‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯ ﻳﺆدﻱ إﱃ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪. /‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ –‪. +/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫راﺟﻊ »ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮ￯« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(45‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "USB‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫)‪.(USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MUSIC‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[VIDEO‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[PHOTO‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ .JPEG‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻛﴩاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[BROWSING‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[BROWSING‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER LIST‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 6‬ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ«‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (63‬أﻭ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬أﻭ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [PICTURE LIST‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﰲ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 2‬ﰲ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[REPEAT‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺒﺪ اﳌﺮد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[MEMORY‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺮار ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺮار اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [TRACK‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺮار‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪) [FILE‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺮار اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،CLEAR‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪[OFF‬‬ ‫ﰲ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮر اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ ،[MEDIA‬راﺟﻊ »أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(97‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ /JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[REPEAT‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ أﻭ ﳎﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰا ﻷﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺄرﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻳﺪة ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬ ‫ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FILE‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ])**( **[ )ﺗﺸﲑ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ** اﱃ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‪ .‬اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ ﻳﺸﲑ إﱃ اﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫(‪1‬‬ ‫)‪1‬‬ ‫)‪1( 144‬‬ ‫‪0: 23‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻒ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ])**( **[ اﱃ ])**( ‪.[--‬‬ ‫(‪1‬‬ ‫)‪1‬‬ ‫)‪1( 144‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪1: 31‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• إذا ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "*" ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭاﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﳊﺎﱄ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ*‬ ‫‪192k MP3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﻭ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻜﺐ ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪:‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭرﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ(*‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪0: 13‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .ID3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ ID3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1‬ﻭ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ID3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻔﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪2002_Remixes‬‬ ‫‪Soul_Survivor_rap_version‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت**‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ**‬ ‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫** إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .ID3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ ID3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1‬و ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ID3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻔﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪/‬اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫ﻋﺪد اﳊﺮﻭﻑ اﳌﺤﺪدة‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ اﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﳋﺎص‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ *Exif‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫(‪2‬‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫)‪6( 30‬‬ ‫‪2 0 0 2 /9 /1 6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎت ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻔﲑﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .MP3‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬راﺟﻊ »ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪«USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(62‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﳏﺪدة ﻷﻏﺮاض اﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺸﺨﴢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﻫﺬا اﳊﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳌﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﳊﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫*‬ ‫"‪) "Exchangeable Image File Format‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻝ( ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮر اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا اﻟﺮﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪Japan Electronics and‬‬ ‫‪.(JEITA) Information Technology Industries Association‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ إﱃ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﱪ ﳏﻮر‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺣﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﰲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬ ‫‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻳﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ اﻟﺒﺖ اﻷﺻﲇ‬ ‫ﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻧﺺ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬ﰲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ اﻧﺸﺎؤﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا اﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ اﻧﺸﺎؤﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ اذا‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻔﺪ اﳊﻴﺰ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺪد اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﱃ‬‫اﳊﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ اﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲤﻴﻴﺰﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻔ ﹰﺎ ﰲ أﻱ ﳎﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪ 199‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﹰا ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﹰا أﺻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼﰲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ رﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ اﺿﺎﰲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﺳﻢ دﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪ CD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،TRANSFER‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ DATA DVD/DATA CD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪) "READING‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮاءة ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻌﺪد‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [TRACK‬أﻭ ]‪، [FOLDER‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﱰ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳊﻴﺰ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪START‬‬ ‫‪ALL‬‬ ‫‪ALL‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪TRACK‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎرات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[ ALL‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد إﻟﻐﺎءﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،TRANSFER‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[TRACK‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ .DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FOLDER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ .DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫‪ MP3‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ اﱃ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "READING‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB TRANSFER‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[START‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[ ALL‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻌﺪد اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺧﱰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ /MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﳊﻴﺰ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪USB TRANSFER‬‬ ‫‪2002_Remixes‬‬ ‫‪01_Back_Seat_O...‬‬ ‫‪02_One_Nights_...‬‬ ‫‪03_Are_You_Ma...‬‬ ‫‪04_I_Can_Lose_...‬‬ ‫‪05_Soul_Survivo...‬‬ ‫‪06_Strangers_B...‬‬ ‫‪07_Stay_maxi_ve...‬‬ ‫‪START‬‬ ‫‪ALL‬‬ ‫‪ALL‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ /MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ALL‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮاد‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎءﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ALL‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[START‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ زر ﻭاﺣﺪة‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺰر ‪.REC TO USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎء اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "READING‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "PUSH PLAY‬ﻭاﳊﻴﺰ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪"COMPLETE‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ MP3‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭض ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎر ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻭذﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻔﲑﻩ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺧﱰ اﳌﺴﺎر‪ /‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ REC TO USB‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪.DATA DVD/DATA CD/CD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎر‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪/MP3‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ REC TO USB‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎء اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "READING‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "PUSH PLAY‬ﻭاﳊﻴﺰ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر‪ /‬اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪"COMPLETE‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬أﻭ‬ ‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻔﲑﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪.DATA DVD/DATA CD/CD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ اﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﺠﻠﺪ "‪"MUSIC‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "ROOT‬ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‬ ‫ﻭاﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺳﻠﻮب ﻣﺼﺪر‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪Audio CD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ اﺳﻤﻪ ﰲ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪(1‬‬ ‫"‪"FLDR001‬‬ ‫‪(3‬‬ ‫‪(2‬‬ ‫"‪"TRACK001‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ CD‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫اﳌﺼﺪر‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫"‪"REC1-MP3‬‬ ‫‪Audio CD‬‬ ‫"‪"REC1-CD‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪(4‬‬ ‫‪(4‬‬ ‫ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ اﺳﻤﻪ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪(1‬‬ ‫‪(3‬‬ ‫"‪"TRACK001‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 64‬رﻣﺰ ﳏﺪدة ﻟﻼﺳﻢ )ﺑﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات ﳏﺪدة ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﳏﺪدة ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "REC1-MP3‬أﻭ "‪"REC1-CD‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪.REC1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة )"‪ ".mp3‬أﻭ "‪".wma‬‬ ‫أﻭ "‪ (".m4a‬ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "USB‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.CLEAR‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.CLEAR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[YES‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﳊﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[NO‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﻧﺰع اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮد اﳌﻠﻔﺎت أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻏﲑ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﳌﺮاد ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Sony Ericsson‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ‪ Sony Ericsson‬إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭاﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬أﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ إﱃ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ارﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ إﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪.(Mass Storage) File Transfer‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻌﺮض‪ :‬راﺟﻊ »ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) «USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(61‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ :‬راﺟﻊ »ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪«USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(69‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﱃ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻝ أﻭ اﺧﺮاج‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﲠﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ أﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﺖ اﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪/HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ إﱃ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫)‪.(USB‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫اﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ Sony‬ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ أﻭ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[AUDIO SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫]‪ ،[SPEAKER FORMATION‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[AUDIO SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫]‪.[SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬ ‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬ ‫‪STANDARD‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[STANDARD‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[NO CENTER‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[NO SURROUND‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[FRONT ONLY‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ALL FRONT‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[ALL FRONT – NO CENTER‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻡ‬ ‫اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷزرار )ﻏﲑ اﻟﺰر ‪،TV ‬‬ ‫‪ ،THEATRE‬ﻭ‪ (TV INPUT‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.TV‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ أﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷزرار‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪TV ‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪THEATRE‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪TV INPUT‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر –‪*VOLUME +/‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر –‪*PROG +/‬‬ ‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ*‪،‬‬ ‫‪*ENTER *-/--‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻭ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪*TOOLS‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪*RETURN‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪*MENU‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪*MUTING‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪،*‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻷزرار ﻣﻊ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ‪ TV‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.DYNAMIC BASS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "D. BASS ON‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DYNAMIC BASS‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ اﳊﻮار ﻛﲈ ﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﰲ ﻣﴪح أﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﳌﻴﺰة ﻣﻔﻴﺪة ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬ ‫أﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺠﻮدة ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺼﺎدر اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.NIGHT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "NIGHT ON‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺆﺛﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻌﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ .Super Audio CD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ ،"NIGHT ON‬ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﳊﺪﻳﺚ )ﺣﻮار اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻞ اﻟﺴﲈع‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ NIGHT‬ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻀﻐﻮط‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻀﻐﻮط ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﱃ "‪."USB‬‬‫ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "DEC. MODE‬إﱃ "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬أﻭ‬‫"‪."A.F.D. MULTI‬‬ ‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻻﻃﻔﺎء ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﺧﱰ أﻱ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻏﲑ "‪ "A.F.D. STD‬أﻭ "‪"A.F.D. MULTI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SOUND MODE‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪ :"AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "MOVIE‬أﻭ‬ ‫"‪ "MUSIC‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ :"MOVIE‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﺼﻮر‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ :"MUSIC‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،Super Audio CD‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ادﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﳛﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﲈع إﱃ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ إﱃ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫‪ TV/VIDEO‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺧﻠ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ دﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭث‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻻدﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "TV/VIDEO‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫"‪ "ATTENUATE‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"ATT ON‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﻫﲔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻻدﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻻﺧﺮاج‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"ATT OFF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ادﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻡ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭاﺣﺪة‬ ‫أﻭ ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SLEEP‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر ‪ ،SLEEP‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )اﳌﺪة‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫"‪ "SLEEP‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮة ﻭاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SLEEP‬ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺪة اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ SLEEP‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪"SLEEP‬‬ ‫"‪ OFF‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫"‪ "SLEEP‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ( ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "SLEEP‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ أﺣﺪ‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.DIMMER‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭاﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ،DIMMER‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "DIMMER‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر أﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﻄﻮع‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"DIMMER OFF‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• "‪ :"DIMMER ON‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪...  ...   ‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮاﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬اﳌﺼﻨﻒ ﻭاﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/(PBC‬‬ ‫‪Super Audio CD/CD‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫‪ ‬اﳌﺴﺎر ﻭاﻟﻔﻬﺮس*‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD/Super Audio CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super VCD‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻧﺺ اﳌﺴﺎر‬ ‫‪ ‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻭاﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) DATA DVD/(MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪(MP3‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭرﻗﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر )اﳌﻠﻒ(*‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ أﻭ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .ID3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ ID3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1‬ﻭ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ID3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻔﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪DATA DVD/‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/(PBC‬‬ ‫‪Super Audio CD/CD‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪ ‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ اﳊﺎﱄ ﻭرﻗﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫• **‪T **:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫• **‪T-**:‬‬ ‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻨﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/‬‬ ‫‪ CD‬ﻣﺜﻞ إﺳﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﱂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "*" ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• **‪D **:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• **‪D-**:‬‬ ‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DATA DVD/(MP3‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(MP3‬‬ ‫• **‪T **:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭاﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1: 01: 40‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﳌﺪة‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﳌﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻭأﻧﻮاع اﳌﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬‬ ‫• **‪T **:**:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫• **‪T-**:**:‬‬ ‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺒﺘﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪DATA DVD/‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫• **‪**:**:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻒ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ ،PBC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪/‬اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫ﻋﺪد ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﳏﺪﻭدة ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﲨﻴﻊ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ اﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻧﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/Super Audio CD/CD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺺ اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD/Super Audio‬‬ ‫‪.CD/CD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD/Super Audio CD/CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﺺ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺺ‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪"NO‬‬ ‫"‪.TEXT‬‬ ‫• **‪C **:**:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫• **‪C-**:**:‬‬ ‫اﳌﺪة اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪Dvorak/Tchaikovsky /NedPho/Kreizberg‬‬ ‫‪Adagio - Allegro molto‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) VIDEO CD‬اﳌﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪(PBC‬‬ ‫• **‪**:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ اﳊﺎﱄ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻧﺺ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ DISPLAY‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪،DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت )ﻛﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﳊﺎﱄ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ*‬ ‫‪192k MP3‬‬ ‫‪0: 13‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪2002_Remixes‬‬ ‫‪Soul_Survivor_rap_version‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪/**MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ**‬ ‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA CD/DATA‬‬ ‫‪.DVD‬‬ ‫** إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺰﻭد ﹰا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،ID3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ أﻭ إﺳﻢ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.ID3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .ID3‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ ID3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0/1.1‬ﻭ‪ 2.2/2.3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ID3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﲔ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻔﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ *Exif‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DATA CD‬‬ ‫(‪5‬‬ ‫)‪8‬‬ ‫)‪10( 15‬‬ ‫‪20 0 2 /9 /1 8‬‬ ‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫"‪) "Exchangeable Image File Format‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻝ( ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮر اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺎت اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪Japan Electronics and‬‬ ‫‪.(JEITA) Information Technology Industries Association‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﺎراﻣﻴﱰ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﱃ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪[SYSTEM‬‬ ‫]‪ ،SETUP‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪.[YES‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [RESET‬ﻭاﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭاﻟﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ [NO‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺜﻮاﲏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﻛﺘﲈﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻷزرار ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "COLD RESET‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻮد اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﲈ ﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [MEDIA‬ﻭ ]‪ [INTERVAL‬ﻭ ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻭ‬ ‫]‪ [MULTI/2CH‬أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ إﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪ [SETUP‬اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ]‪) [SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬اﱃ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ‪[PARENTAL‬‬ ‫]‪.CONTROL‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر –‪ FUNCTION +/‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة اﱃ أﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪[SETUP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳋﻴﺎرات اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪.[SETUP‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]‪ ،[CUSTOM‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎت اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳌﺪة‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬اﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺤﺐ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ اﳊﺮارة ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﺎﻝ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ اﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﻨ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬا ﻋﲆ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻔﺎدﻱ ﳌﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ اﳍﻴﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﳏﺼﻮر ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ردﻳﺌﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ‬ ‫اﲪﺎء زاﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺣﺠﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ أﻱ ﳾء ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﻘﺪرة‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﺳﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻﲪﺎء زاﺋﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﻭث‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﺢ )ﺳﺠﺎدة‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( أﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد )ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺒﺴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﳊﺮارة ﻛﺎﳌﺸﻌﺎت أﻭ‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ أﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮض ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ ﻏﺒﺎر‬ ‫ﻛﺜﲑ أﻭ اﻫﺘﺰازات ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ أﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬اﳖﺎ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻓﺮاﻥ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ أﻭ ﻣﻜﱪات اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺒﲑة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫• إذا ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎرد إﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ داﻓﺊ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪ ،‬أﻭ اذا‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪة اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺜﻒ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺗﺮﻙ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪة ﺣﻮاﱄ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﱃ اﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻭإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﳊﺎﻕ ﴐر‬ ‫ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا دﺧﻞ ﳾء ﻣﺎ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‬ ‫ﻭاﻃﻠﺐ ﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ زﻳﺎدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﲈع اﱃ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺰﻭد‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪة اﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎض أﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﲠﺎ‪ .‬ﻭإﻻ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﳊﺎﻕ ﴐر ﺑﺎﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ إﺻﺪار ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯‬ ‫اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﳍﻴﻜﻞ ﻭاﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﲈء اﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ اﳌﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫أﻱ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﻮاد اﻟﻜﺎﺷﻄﺔ أﻭ ﳏﺮﻭﻗﺎت اﻟﺼﻘﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ أﻭ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻳﺔ أﺳﺌﻠﺔ أﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ أﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﻧﻮاع اﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬﻩ اﳌﻮاد أﻥ ﺗﺆدﻱ اﱃ ﺧﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر أﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ‪ 15‬اﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫أﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ أﻭ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻏﲑ‬ ‫ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﱰﻙ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﳌﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ أﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ إﳊﺎﻕ ﴐر داﺋﻢ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت اﻹﺳﻘﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻹﴐار ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻳﺔ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻧﺰع ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮﻝ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﳌﺲ ﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ إﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻭرﻗﺔ أﻭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻣﺴﺢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺮﻛﺰ اﱃ اﳊﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺣﺮارة ﻣﺜﻞ أﻧﺒﻮب اﳍﻮاء اﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ أﻭ ﻻ ﺗﱰﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎرة ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮض ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‬ ‫ﻻﻥ درﺟﺔ اﳊﺮارة ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ اﳌﻘﺼﻮرة ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ اﱃ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﲑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ أﻱ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻗﻖ اﻟﻄﻼء )ﺛﻨﺮ( أﻭ اﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎت اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﰲ اﻷﺳﻮاﻕ أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﺷﺔ اﳌﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ اﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﳍﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ داﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ داﺋﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﲆ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻭ ﻗﻠﺐ أﻭ ﻧﺠﻢ( أﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﱃ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﲈﻟﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﰲ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻮاﻕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻱ اﳋﻠﻞ ﻭإﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻱ اﳋﻠﻞ ﻭإﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﻫﺬا ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﻋﲆ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫إذا ﻭاﺟﻬﺖ أﻱ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺘﺎﻋﺐ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ دﻟﻴﻞ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ .‬إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻹﺻﻼح‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻥ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ "‪ "STANDBY‬ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "PROTECTOR‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭاﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺎء اﳌﺆﴍ‬ ‫ﻭ"‪ "PUSH POWER‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪."STANDBY‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻞ ﺣﺪث ﲤﺎس ﰲ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭاﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪-‬؟‬ ‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ؟‬ ‫• ﻫﻞ ﺛﻘﻮب اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﳏﺠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﳾء؟‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد أﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ أﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ إﳚﺎد‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة أﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﻳﺔ ﺻﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫إرﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ]‪ [TV TYPE‬اﳋﺎص‬ ‫ﺑـ ]‪ ،[VIDEO SETUP‬اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻻ ﲤﻸ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫• أﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• أﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻹدﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺮﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة إﺷﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻓﺤﺺ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ إﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫• أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ اﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز دﺧﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content‬‬ ‫)‪) Protection‬ﻻ ﻳﴤء "‪ "HDMI‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫• إذا ﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻻﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻮع اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳋﺎرﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ .HDMI OUT‬ﲠﺬا‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻭﺣﺪة ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻨﻮع ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ دﺧﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﱃ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻮع ﺧﺮج اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ دﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدﺗﻪ اﱃ‬ ‫‪ .HDMI‬اذا ﻻ زاﻟﺖ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ أﻭ ﲠﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إرﺳﺎﻝ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VCR‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻹﺷﺎرات ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD‬أﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ .‬إذا ﻭاﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﱪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،VCR‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻚ إﱃ ﻃﺮﻑ ادﺧﺎﻝ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﳛﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳛﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﰲ اﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع أﻧﺒﻮب اﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺛﻮدﻳﺔ ‪ CRT‬أﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ إﺳﻘﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 0.3‬ﻣﱰ ﻋﲆ اﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ‪ 15‬اﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﺣﺪث زﻋﻴﻖ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﴚ‪ ،‬أﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻳﺔ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﺰﻻج ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺮﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ MUTING‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪"MUTING ON‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳚﺮﻱ اﻵﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ أﻭ اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫• اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﳜﺮج ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ • .HDMI OUT‬اﺿﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز )‪) DVI (Digital Visual Interface‬اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪DVI (Digital‬‬ ‫)‪ Visual Interface‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت(‪.‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻻﺟﺮاءات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪  :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮ￯‪  .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻭاﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮ￯‪  .‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭأﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻮات اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ • ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭاﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮازﻧﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﲈع ﻃﻨﲔ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺷﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(54 ،20‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت ﻭاﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ أﺳﻼﻙ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻋﻦ اﳌﺤﻮﻻت أﻭ اﳌﻮﺗﻮرات‪ ،‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﳖﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎح اﻟﻔﻠﻮرﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 3‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﻋﲆ اﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰا ﻋﻦ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺴﺎت ﻭاﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬اﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﺄﺛﲑ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ • اﺧﱰ ﺻﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪) AUDIO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬أﻭ ‪ CD‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺳﲈع ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ • ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎص‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(54 ،20‬‬ ‫‪MPEG‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ ‪ DTS‬أﻭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 5.1‬ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻹﺷﺎرات‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ أﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺴﺠ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Dolby Digital‬أﻭ ‪.MPEG‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(54 ،20‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ أﻗﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ • ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺟﺪ ﹰا ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت )ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ‪.(54 ،20‬‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪) "DEC. MODE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ أﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺂﺛﲑ ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬ﹰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ إذا اﺳﺘﺪﻋﻰ اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرات اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰا )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﳏﻄﺎت ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أﻳﺔ ﳏﻄﺔ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ أﻭ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ(‪ .‬اﺣﻔﻆ ﳏﻄﺎت ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫• اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺤﻨﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﳌﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أﻳﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﳏﻤﻠﺔ رأﺳ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺠﻬ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(5‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺜﻔﺖ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭاﺗﺮﻙ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪة ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬أﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(Universal Disk Format) UDF‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".mp3‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أﳖﺎ ﻣﺰﻭدة ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".mp3‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3PRO‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬أﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(Universal Disk Format) UDF‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﲆ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".jpeg‬أﻭ "‪.".jpg‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 3‚072‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 2‚048‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪ ،‬أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‚000‚000‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ اﻻﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺼﻮر(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎت اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪/‬إﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮض أرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻫﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺣﺮﻭﻑ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]*[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻧﺸﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DivX‬أﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.MP4‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﲆ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻏﲑ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪ ".divx‬أﻭ "‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ "‪.".m4v‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2‬أﻭ ‪.Joliet‬‬ ‫• ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(Universal Disk Format) UDF‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪاﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ﳐﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﺑﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ أﻭ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DVD‬أﻭ ‪ PBC‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ • .‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﻭ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ أﻭ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ أﻭ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ]‪ [OSD‬ﲢﺖ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [LANGUAGE SETUP‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺎرات ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﲨﺎت ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﲨﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ إﻳﻘﺎﻑ اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• زﻭاﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺰﻭاﻳﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺧﺮاج اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫"‪ "LOCKED‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪ [Data error‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DATA‬‬ ‫‪ CD‬أﻭ ‪.DATA DVD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ /MP3‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ /JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.DCF‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".jpg‬أﻭ "‪ ،".jpeg‬اﻻ اﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪ ،".divx‬اﻻ اﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،DivX‬أﻭ اﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺼﺎدﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪.DivX Certified‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ "‪ ،".m4v‬اﻻ اﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،MP4‬أﻭ اﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP4‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﰲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.MPEG4 Simple Profiles‬‬ ‫• اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻋﻦ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ اﳉﺪارﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭر ﻋﺪة‬ ‫دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ • .HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻀﺊ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪ "HDMI‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪.[CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺎﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .HDMI‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬اﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻪ اﻭ ﺣﺪث اﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﰲ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CONTROL FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪CONTROL‬‬ ‫‪ [FOR HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭاﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ • اﺿﺒﻂ ])‪ [AUDIO (HDMI‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI SETUP‬اﱃ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻥ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺟﻞ ‪«"BRAVIA" Sync‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ؟‬ ‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪث اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ »اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫‪ USB‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ« )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ( ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ أﻧﻮاع اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬‫ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺳﲈء اﳌﻠﻒ أﻭ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻏﲑ ﳑﻜﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت ﻣﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻧﺘﻬﺎءﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬اﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺸﻔﺮة‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻻت ﺑﺖ أﻋﲆ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ )‪ .(USB‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪"REMOVE ،"OVERLOAD‬‬ ‫"‪ ،USB‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "PUSH POWER‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭاﻧﺰع اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ اﳌﻨﻔﺬ )‪ .(USB‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮد أﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰲ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﻇﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫• اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺿﻮﺿﺎء أﻭ ﲣﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫)‪.(USB‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭأﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• رﺑﲈ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬اﺣﺬﻑ اﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻧﺴﺦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎزﻙ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ FAT12‬أﻭ ‪ FAT16‬أﻭ ‪،FAT32‬‬ ‫ﻭاﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪*.‬‬ ‫* ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ FAT12‬ﻭ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ ،FAT32‬إﻻ اﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﺎﻧﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ اﳉﺰء اﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﺠﻬ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎﻩ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳍﺎﻣﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﱃ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ FAT12‬أﻭ ‪ FAT16‬أﻭ ‪ ،FAT32‬ﻭاﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪*.‬‬ ‫* ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ FAT12‬ﻭ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ ،FAT32‬إﻻ اﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﺎﻧﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻃﻮﻳ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻼ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮاءة ﰲ اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أﻭ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬‫ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻛﺒﲑة ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬‫ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﻻﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ 200 :USB‬أﻭ أﻗﻞ‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﺪد اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻻﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﳎﻠﺪ‪ 150 :‬أﻭ أﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "READING‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﳌﺪة‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ • .‬اﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮات اﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﻭاﳊﺮﻭﻑ اﳍﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﳊﺮﻭﻑ اﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة "‪ "DATA ERROR‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ • ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪/ JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪.MPEG1 Audio Layer 3‬‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.DCF‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".jpg‬أﻭ "‪ ،".jpeg‬اﻻ اﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪ ،".divx‬اﻻ اﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،DivX‬أﻭ اﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺼﺎدﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪.DivX Certified‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ "‪ ،".m4v‬اﻻ اﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،MP4‬أﻭ اﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP4‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﰲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.MPEG4 Simple Profiles‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭأﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ »اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ«‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ ‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ﳐﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻭ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭاﺑﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ إﱃ أﻥ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.AAC‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) USB‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ /JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫• أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﳌﺼﺎﻏﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻏﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ FAT12‬ﻭ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪*.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ اﻟﻄﺒﻊ أﻭ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﴪ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".mp3‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ WMA‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".wma‬‬ ‫• اﳌﻠﻒ ‪ AAC‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭد ﺑﺎﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪.".m4a‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".avi‬أﻭ "‪.".divx‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ "‪ ".mp4‬أﻭ "‪.".m4v‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻏﲑ ﳏﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﳌﺼﺎﻏﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪.MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ اﱃ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻻ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳉﺰء اﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻤﻘﻬﺎ ‪ 8‬ﳎﻠﺪات ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(66‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.200‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪ /‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ /JPEG‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻠﻔ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ”‪ “.jpg‬أﻭ ”‪.“.jpeg‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪) 3,072‬ﻋﺮض( × ‪) 2,048‬ارﺗﻔﺎع( ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎدﻱ‪ ،‬أﻭ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2,000,000‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ ‪ JPEG‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ اﻻﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻭاﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.MP3PRO‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ WMA‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ WMA DRM‬أﻭ ‪ WMA Lossless‬أﻭ ‪.WMA PRO‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ AAC‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ AAC DRM‬أﻭ ‪.AAC Lossless‬‬ ‫* ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ FAT12‬ﻭ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ ،FAT32‬إﻻ اﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﻭ ﺻﺎﻧﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ • ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ أﻥ ﻗﺎﻡ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺮاءة ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻗﺖ أﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت أﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات أﻭ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﺜﲑ ﹰا ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ أﻭ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻛﺒﲑة ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﲑ ﹰا ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬاﻛﺮة ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﴆ ﴍﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﺪد اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ 200 :USB‬أﻭ أﻗﻞ‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﺪد اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻟﻜﻞ ﳎﻠﺪ‪ 150 :‬أﻭ أﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﳋﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ اﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ أﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ اﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﳑﺘﻞء‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﱃ اﳊﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ‪.‬‬‫ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﳏﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺗﺆدﻱ إﱃ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭث ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﴎﻋﺔ اﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﺪ ﹰا‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻرﺳﺎﻝ ﻭاﳌﺴﺢ ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻌﻘﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﳋﻄﻮات اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ »أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض« )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﻭ اﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﳋﻄﻮات اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬إذا‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﳑﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻥ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﳏﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ اﳌﻤﺴﻮح‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬إذا ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ ﻛﻮﻥ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺗﺎﻟﻔ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﳋﻄﻮات‬ ‫اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ‬ ‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ /‬أرﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭاﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ رﻗﻢ رﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﳋﺎﻧﺎت )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪C 13 ،‬‬ ‫‪ (50‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ أﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻘﹼﺪ اﳉﺪﻭﻝ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C:13:50‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ أﻭﱃ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭ‪ /‬أﻭ اﻻﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪C 13‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﲈش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(83‬‬ ‫‪C 31‬‬ ‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬أﻋﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﲢﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻟﺬاﰐ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدﻱ‬ ‫‪E XX‬‬ ‫)‪ XX‬ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ رﻗﻢ( ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة أﻗﺮب ﻣﻮزع ﺳﻮﲏ ‪Sony‬‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪ Sony‬اﳌﺤﲇ اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ إﺑﻼﻏﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪E 61 10 :‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻻﺻﺪار ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻹﺻﺪار ]‪ X) [VER.X.XX‬ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ رﻗﻢ(‪ .‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫أﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﲑ اﱃ ﻭﺟﻮد ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﻮﲏ ‪ Sony‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ اﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪VER.X.XX‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ )ﻣﻘﺪر( ‪ 65‬ﻭاط ‪ 65 +‬ﻭاط )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ( ﻗﺪرة اﻹﺧﺮاج ‪RMS‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪ￯‪/‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪/‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪/‬ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻴﴪ￯‪/‬اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ*‪ 83 :‬ﻭاط )ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎة‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%10‬‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ*‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 85‬ﻭاط )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‪ 80 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ ‪(%10‬‬ ‫* ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ﻭاﳌﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أﻱ ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫أﻃﺮاﻑ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ )إﺷﺎرات ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )أﻧﺎﻟﻮج((‬ ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ (AUDIO IN) TV/VIDEO‬اﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 250/450 :‬ﻣﻴﲇ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎث‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰاﻳﺎ داﻳﻮد اﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎث‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻴﺰرﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻠﻴﺰر‪ :‬أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 44.6‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﻭاط‬ ‫* ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﳋﺮج ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﺸﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 7‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭاﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬ ‫‪NTSC/PAL‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬ ‫‪ 500‬ﻣﻴﲇ أﻣﺒﲑ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺮددات رﻗﻤﻲ ‪ PLL‬ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﻛﻮارﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔﺑﺄﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ‪ 87.5 :‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 108.0 -‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫)‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 87.5‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 108.0 -‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫)‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬ ‫اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬ ‫أﻃﺮاﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳍﻮاﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 75‬أﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮازﻥ‬ ‫اﻟﱰدد اﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪10.7‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫أﻃﺮاﻑ اﳋﺮج‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 255‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 1,000/970/940/910‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫× ‪ 255‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 103‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 545‬ﻣﻢ × ‪86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻢ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪(SS-TS95) DAV-TZ300‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ )‪(SS-CT91‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫‪ 75 ،1 Vp-p :VIDEO‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ :HDMI OUT‬ﻧﻮع ‪ 19) A‬دﺑﻮس(‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات‪ ،‬ﳏﺠﻮب ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 265‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 94‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 77‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 0.7‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪(SS-TS92) DAV-TZ100/DAV-TZ200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻔﺬ )‪:(USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻗﴡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 103‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 164‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 94‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 0.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super Audio CD/DVD‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪(SS-TS92) DAV-TZ100/DAV-TZ200‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 103‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 164‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 94‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 0.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪(SS-TS95) DAV-TZ300‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪ￯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 65‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 255‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 1,000/970/940/910‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫× ‪ 255‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 103‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 545‬ﻣﻢ × ‪86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻢ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪(SS-WS96) DAV-TZ100/DAV-TZ200‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 169‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 300‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 335‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ‪(SS-WS92) DAV-TZ300‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ اﳌﻘﺪرة‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﳐﺮﻭﻃﻲ ‪ 180‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬أﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 225‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 395‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 335‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 6.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﺸﲈﻟﻴﺔ ﻭاﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪ 60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺎﻳﻮاﻥ‪ 120 :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‪60/50 ،‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻرﺟﻨﺘﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 220‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ – ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﳌﱰدد‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 110‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ – ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﳌﱰدد‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﻷﺧﺮ￯‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 220‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﳌﱰدد‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 100 :‬ﻭاط‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬ﻭاط )ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﲑ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫‪ 430‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 67‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 335‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬‬ ‫ارﺗﻔﺎع‪ /‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺑﲈ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻷﺟﺰاء‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺎرزة‬ ‫اﻟﻮزﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫)‪MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮدد اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت‪:‬‬ ‫‪mp3‬‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 48/44.1/32‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪) WMA‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪wma‬‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮدد اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت‪:‬‬ ‫‪) AAC‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮدد اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪m4a‬‬ ‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ اﻻﻃﺎر‪:‬‬ ‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت‪:‬‬ ‫‪MPEG4‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ اﻻﻃﺎر‪:‬‬ ‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﲑ اﻟﺼﻮت‪:‬‬ ‫‪:DRM‬‬ ‫‪avi/divx‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )أﻗﴡ(‬ ‫‪ 30‬اﻃﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪720 × 576‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪MP4‬‬ ‫‪mp4/m4v‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪MPEG4 Simple Profile‬‬ ‫)اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ AVC‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 30‬اﻃﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪720 × 576‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪) AAC-LC‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪HE-AAC‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭاﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﲑ دﻭﻥ اﺷﻌﺎر ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺠﻢ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪(4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳉﻮدة ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪DSD‬‬ ‫)‪) Direct Stream Digital‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ(( )أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .(PCM‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪،DSD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺗﺮدد ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ اﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﺬﻱ ﰲ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 64‬ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬ﻭاﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻤﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮدد ﻭاﺳﻊ ﻭﻣﺪ￯ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭاﺳﻊ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺪ￯ اﻟﱰدد‬ ‫اﳌﺴﻤﻮع‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻫﻲ ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﲤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻻﺻﲇ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻧﻮاع اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎج ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﺣﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫)اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻭاﺣﺪة(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫‪(2‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻫﺠﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫)اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪(CD‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Audio CD‬‬ ‫‪(3CD‬‬ ‫‪(3Super‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ أﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺗﲔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺴﺎرات‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات )ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ اﱃ ‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮات(‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ ﻛﻼ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﲔ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ داﻋﻲ ﻟﻘﻠﺐ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super‬‬ ‫‪ Audio CD‬ﻫﺠﻴﻨﺔ« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super‬‬ ‫‪) «Audio CD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(34‬‬ ‫رﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ‪Parental Control‬‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ أﻋﲈر اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﻘﻴﻮد ﻣﻦ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﱃ أﺧﺮ￯؛‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ أﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻒ أﻭ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﳍﺎ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﻫﻜﺬا‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Audio CD‬ﻭﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :Super Audio CD‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ذات اﺷﺎرة ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :(1CD‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮاءة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬ ‫‪(4‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫)اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﳌﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج ‪ 60 - 50‬إﻃﺎر ﹰا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ )‪ 525‬ﺧﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.(NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻻﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺰداد ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭاﻟﻨﺼﻮص ﻭاﳋﻄﻮط اﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ أﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ‪ 525‬أﻭ ‪.625‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‬ ‫)اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ(‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ NTSC‬ﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻮر ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬إﻃﺎر ﹰا ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻛﻞ‬ ‫إﻃﺎر ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭب ﺑﲔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﺳﺘﻄﻼع ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﻄﻮط اﺳﺘﻄﻼع زﻭﺟﻴﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 60‬إﻃﺎر ﹰا ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻣﴪح اﻷﻓﻼﻡ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ أﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮر ﹰا ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪ .Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻮﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ إﻋﻄﺎء اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ اﱃ‬ ‫ﳎﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻹﺻﺪار ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ أﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ "‪"5.1‬‬ ‫ﻷﻥ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻛﻘﻨﺎة ‪) 0.1‬ﻻﳖﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ إﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ اﳊﺎﺟﺔ اﱃ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﱰددات(‪ .‬ﻭأﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ إﺷﺎرة ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ اﻻﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ اﳌﺘﻔﻮﻕ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ أﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫رﻗﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻳﻜﻮﻥ أﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ ‪Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ ‪Dolby Pro Logic‬‬ ‫‪ II‬ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ اﻟﱰددﻱ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ اﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮات ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮج اﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳊﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ دﻭﻥ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أﺻﻮات ﺟﺪﻳﺪة أﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﰐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ ﳐﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻭﲨﻴﻊ اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪ .Dolby Surround‬ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ اﲡﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﺪ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺪرﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﱰب ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮدة‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ‪ 5.1‬ﻗﻨﺎة ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﳐﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻣﻊ أﻱ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮت ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺣﻴﺰ ﹰا ﺻﻮﺗﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﺮﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻤﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫‪Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻫﺬا إﺣﺪ￯ اﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة إﺷﺎرات ﺻﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ‬ ‫اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭاﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﺑﺼﻮرة أﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﺻﻮات ﺑﺪﻗﺔ أﻛﱪ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎدة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰة‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫‪ Dolby Surround Pro Logic‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ أﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ زﻭج ﻭاﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻭاﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺳﲈﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻏﲑ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ اﳌﴪﺣﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DTS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ .DTS, Inc.‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ .5.1‬ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻗﻨﺎة ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻨﺎة‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﳌﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﱰددات اﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪DTS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻨﺢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة ‪ 5.1‬اﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰا ﻷﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﲨﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ رﻗﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪High-Definition Multimedia) HDMI‬‬ ‫‪(Interface‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت ﻭﺻﻮرة ﻋﺎﱄ اﳉﻮدة‪ .‬ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪High-bandwidth Digital Content) HDCP‬‬ ‫‪ ،(Protection‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻇﻒ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﲑ ﻻﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﳉﺪﻭﻝ أدﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﴩح أﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻷﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪.[MEDIA‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ أﻭ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪[MEDIA‬‬ ‫]‪[VIDEO‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪[MUSIC/‬‬ ‫]‪PHOTO‬‬ ‫]‪[PHOTO‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ /‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ /‬ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪[MUSIC‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت*‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪97‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬ .ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) ‫ﲥﺠﺌﺔ أﺳﲈء اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ 1027 1028 1032 1039 1044 1045 1051 1052 1053 1057 1059 1060 1061 1066 1183 1186 1194 1196 1203 1209 1217 1226 1229 1233 1235 1239 1245 1248 1253 1254 1257 1261 1269 1283 1287 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1305 1307 1311 1313 1326 1327 1332 1334 1347 1349 1350 1352 1353 1356 1357 1358 1363 1365 1369 1376 1379 1393 1403 1408 1417 1428 1435 1507 1508 1509 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1521 1525 1527 1528 1529 1531 1532 1534 1535 1538 1539 1540 1543 1557 1564 1572 1581 1587 1613 1632 1665 1684 1697 1067 1070 1079 1093 1097 1103 1105 1109 1130 1142 1144 1145 1149 1150 1151 1157 1165 1166 1171 1174 1181 Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bislama Bengali; Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish German Bhutani Greek English Esperanto Spanish Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese French Frisian Irish Scots Gaelic Galician Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laothian Lithuanian Latvian; Lettish 1345 Malagasy 1436 1463 1481 1482 1483 1489 1491 1495 1498 1501 1502 1503 1505 1506 Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Dutch Norwegian Occitan (Afan)Oromo Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto; Pushto Portuguese Quechua RhaetoRomance Kirundi Romanian Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho SerboCroatian Singhalese Slovak Slovenian Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Setswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapük Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu 1703 ‫ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﹼ د‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ 2044 2047 2046 2057 2070 2079 2090 2092 2115 2165 2174 2109 2248 2238 2254 2276 2304 2363 Finland France Germany India Indonesia Italy Japan Korea Malaysia 2362 2376 2390 2379 2427 2424 2436 2489 2501 Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Pakistan Philippines Portugal Russia Singapore 2149 2499 2086 2528 2184 Spain Sweden Switzerland Thailand United Kingdom Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Denmark AR 98 ‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻷﺟﺰاء ﻭأزرار اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﺸﺎر اﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ اﻷﻗﻮاس‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪(101‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪) ‬اﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪/‬اﻹﻏﻼﻕ( )‪(31‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪(28) FUNCTION‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ( )‪(10‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪(31) VOLUME‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪) ‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( )‪(81 ،26‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ‪(71) REC TO USB‬‬ ‫)‪(62) (USB‬‬ ‫اﳌﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(31) OPERATION DIAL‬‬ ‫أزرار اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(31‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )‪(31‬‬ ‫‪99‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ANTENNA FM COAXIAL 75 VIDEO OUT SPEAKER HDMI OUT L TV/ AUDIO IN VIDEO R FRONT R FRONT L SUR R ONLY FOR SS-TS95 SUR L CENTER SUBWOOFER ONLY FOR ONLY FOR SS-CT91 SS-WS92 (22) (AUDIO IN L/R) TV/VIDEO ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ (21) HDMI OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬   (20) SPEAKER ‫اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬  (24) FM COAXIAL 75Ω ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬  (21) VIDEO OUT ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬  AR 100 ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ أﻭ‬ ‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮﻗﺖ أﻭ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ أﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض أﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﳏﻄﺔ‪) .‬اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(56‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺴﺘﲑﻳﻮ‪/‬ﻏﲑ ﺳﺘﲑﻳﻮ )اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ( )‪(57‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ اﱃ ‪High-bandwidth Digital) HDCP‬‬ ‫‪ (Content Protection‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬اﻭ ‪Digital Visual) DVI‬‬ ‫‪(21) .(Interface‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪(77) .‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪(JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ اﻷﻟﻮاﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬ ‫‪) .NTSC‬اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻥ اﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭاﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻠﺪاﻥ اﻟﴩﻕ اﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮب اﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎء أﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ‪(69) .USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.Super Audio CD/CD‬‬ ‫)‪(34‬‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫أﻭﺻﺎﻑ اﻷزرار‬ (75 ،56 ،35)  ‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎﻡ‬ (31 ،26 ،25)  (‫اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬/‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ (75)  (‫اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬/‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬TV    (74 ،56 ،36 ،34 ،26 ،25) (61 ،41)  +/- ‫اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳍﺠﺎﺋﻲ اﻻﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ P–Z (32)  ANGLE (57) wj PRESET +/– (33)  AUDIO (75) wj PROG +/– (57 ،36) es CLEAR  (2 S-AIR MODE (77)  SLEEP (76)  SOUND MODE REPLAY/ADVANCE A–O (64 ،42)  PICTURE NAVI (57)  D.TUNING (78)  DIMMER (78 ،68 ،58)  DISPLAY (31)  (32)  SUBTITLE (39)  DVD MENU (31) wj  ،56 ،29 ،25)  SYSTEM MENU (39)  DVD TOP MENU (31)   (77 (75)  DYNAMIC BASS (31)  STEP  (31)  (‫ )ﺑﻂء‬SLOW (59)  THEATRE (75)  ENTER  (75)  TOOLS (31 ،28)  FUNCTION +/– (31) e; (‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ (56)  TUNING +/– (31)  (‫ )ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ (75) wl TV (75)  MENU (75)  TV INPUT (31)  MUTING (31)  VOLUME +/– (75)  NIGHT (31) wk (‫ )إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ،49 ،36 ،34 ،26)  (3 DISPLAY (103 ،74 (75 ،35) ea RETURN  (1 MEMORY SELECT (60)  ONE-TOUCH PLAY (75) es -/-- .‫راﺟﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ اﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬ .‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﳍﺬا اﳌﻮدﻳﻞ‬ ‫" أﻭ‬DVD" ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬."DMPORT"‫" أﻭ‬USB" DIGITAL ‫ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ .MEDIA PORT (1 (2 (3 AR 102 ‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪...    ...    ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﹰا‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪) 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "DVD‬أﻭ "‪."USB‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬اﱃ ﺑﻨﻮد ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﺸﺎر اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﲔ اﻷﻗﻮاس‪.‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪد اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫)‪ ‬ﻋﺮض‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ‬إﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪد اﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)‪98( 99‬‬ ‫)‪13( 99‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪0: 04: 17‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫‪DISC‬‬ ‫‪TITLE‬‬ ‫‪CHAPTER‬‬ ‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﳋﻴﺎرات‬ ‫‪REPEAT‬‬ ‫‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪Quit:‬‬ ‫‪ENTER‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء اﳌﺆﴍ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪DISPLAY‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭأﻧﻮاع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﺼﻨﻒ ]‪) [TITLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(39‬اﳌﺸﻬﺪ ]‪) [SCENE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(39‬اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪) [TRACK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺼﻨﻒ أﻭ اﳌﺸﻬﺪ أﻭ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ]‪) [CHAPTER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(39‬اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ]‪) [INDEX‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أﻭ اﻟﻔﻬﺮس اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ]‪) [INDEX‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻬﺮس ﻭاﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪) [TRACK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت )اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ (DVD-RW/DVD-R‬اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ ]‪ [ORIGINAL‬أﻭ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻩ ]‪.[PLAY LIST‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ]‪) [TIME‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ اﳌﻨﻘﴤ ﻭزﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎدﺧﺎﻝ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ )أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO/DVD-VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [MULTI/2CH‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪) [SUPER AUDIO CD/CD LAYER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ Super Audio CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ]‪) [PROGRAM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ]‪) [SHUFFLE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﳌﺴﺎرات‪ /‬اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ]‪) [REPEAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(38‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ )ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺼﻨﻔﺎت‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺴﺎرات‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت( ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪ ،‬أﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻨﻒ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎر‪/‬ﳎﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭاﺣﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة ]‪) [A/V SYNC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻ ﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪) [DISC MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ]‪) [BROWSING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬ ‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ]‪[CUSTOM‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﱃ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،Quick Setup‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺎت ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ]‪) [QUICK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﴪﻳﻌﺔ ‪ Quick Setup‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض‪ /‬إرﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [FOLDER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ ]‪) [FILE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ]‪) [DATE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(80‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ]‪) [INTERVAL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪) [EFFECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﲑا رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺳﻼﻳﺪ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﳌﺮاد اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺳﻼﻳﺪ( أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ أﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫‪ (JPEG‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬ ‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD/DATA DVD‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪105‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻮد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫إﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭاﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭأﻧﻮاع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ]‪) [REPEAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ )ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﲨﻴﻊ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت( ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة أﻭﳎﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭاﺣﺪ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺘﻜﺮرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ]‪) [BROWSING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ]‪) [DATE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(69‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑا اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ]‪) [INTERVAL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺪة اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ]‪) [EFFECT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﳌﺮاد اﺳﺘﻌﲈﳍﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ]‪) [MEDIA‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(66‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3/AAC/WMA‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬أﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﱃ اﳉﻬﺎز ‪) [USB TRANSFER] USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(69‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ أﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD/DATA CD/DATA DVD‬إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ]‪[SHUFFLE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺎر ]‪[TRACK‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎر ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ ]‪[FOLDER‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﳎﻠﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﻠﻒ ]‪[FILE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ ]‪[TIME‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺪة اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[A/V SYNC‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻭاﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺜﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪) [OFF‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫اﳌﱪﻣﺞ ]‪ ،[PROGRAM‬ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ]‪ [SHUFFLE‬ﻭاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر ]‪ [REPEAT‬ﻭﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻭاﻟﺼﻮرة ]‪ [A/V SYNC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ اﳌﺼﻨﻒ اﻷﺻﲇ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪[PLAY LIST‬‬ ‫)اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ(‪ .‬ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ ]‪ [MULTI/2CH‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻋﲆ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪Super‬‬ ‫‪.Audio CD‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬ ‫ا‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪35‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ CD‬اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺮاﺣﻞ ‪Multi‬‬ ‫‪6 Session‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ‪5‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪45 DATA CD‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪45 DATA DVD‬‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪95 ،34 Super Audio CD‬‬ ‫اﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮض ﻓﻮرﻱ ‪32‬‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪59 HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ‪57‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ ‪36‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮرﻱ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ‪81 ،49 SETUP‬‬ ‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﴎﻳﻌﺔ ‪26 Quick Setup‬‬ ‫ج‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪61 USB‬‬ ‫ر‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪7‬‬ ‫ز‬ ‫زر ‪32 ANGLE‬‬ ‫زر ‪58 DISPLAY‬‬ ‫زر ‪75 DYNAMIC BASS‬‬ ‫زر ‪75 NIGHT‬‬ ‫زر ‪64 ،42 PICTURE NAVI‬‬ ‫زر ‪77 SLEEP‬‬ ‫زر ‪،57 ،29 ،25 SYSTEM MENU‬‬ ‫‪78 ،77‬‬ ‫ش‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪101 ،78‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪103‬‬ ‫ﴍاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ ‪43‬‬ ‫ص‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪33 5.1‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ‪95‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ‪95‬‬ ‫ع‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ‪35 PBC‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪39 DVD‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ‪98‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪99‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪100‬‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪77 ATTENUATE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪81 COLD RESET‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪25 DEMO‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪78 DIMMER‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪57 FM MODE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪40 TIME‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ‪61‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪61 ،41 JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪61 DivX‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪54 ،45 DivX‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪61 AAC‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪61 ،41 MP3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪61 WMA‬‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪Dolby Digital‬‬ ‫‪96 ،33‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫‪96 Pro Logic II‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ دﻭﻟﺒﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﱰﻓﲔ اﳋﺎص‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮت اﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪Dolby Surround‬‬ ‫‪96 Pro Logic‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﴪﺣﻲ رﻗﻤﻲ ‪96 ،33 DTS‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪،45 ،44 ،43 ،42 ،41 MEDIA‬‬ ‫‪67 ،66 ،64 ،63‬‬ ‫‪53 AUDIO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪53 BACKGROUND‬‬ ‫‪) BLACK LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺴﻮاد(‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫)‪51 COLOR SYSTEM (VIDEO CD‬‬ ‫‪52 CONTROL FOR HDMI‬‬ ‫‪81 ،49 CUSTOM‬‬ ‫‪65 ،44 EFFECT‬‬ ‫‪HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia‬‬ ‫)‪96 Interface‬‬ ‫‪51 HDMI RESOLUTION‬‬ ‫‪51 HDMI SETUP‬‬ ‫)‪52 HDMI YCBCR/RGB (HDMI‬‬ ‫‪65 ،41 INTERVAL‬‬ ‫‪52 JPEG RESOLUTION‬‬ ‫‪50 LANGUAGE SETUP‬‬ ‫‪) MENU‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪50‬‬ ‫‪61 ،45 MPEG4‬‬ ‫‪54 MULTI-DISC RESUME‬‬ ‫‪) OSD‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﲆ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ‪50‬‬ ‫‪95 ،53 ،47 PARENTAL CONTROL‬‬ ‫‪) PAUSE MODE‬ﻭﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ( ‪51‬‬ ‫‪81 ،54 RESET‬‬ ‫‪53 SCREEN SAVER‬‬ ‫‪SPEAKER FORMATION‬‬ ‫‪74 ،53‬‬ ‫‪54 SPEAKER SETUP‬‬ ‫‪) CONNECTION‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ( ‪54‬‬ ‫‪) DISTANCE‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ( ‪54‬‬ ‫‪) LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪55‬‬ ‫‪) SUBTITLE‬اﻟﱰﲨﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ( ‪50 ،33‬‬ ‫‪53 SYSTEM SETUP‬‬ ‫‪) TEST TONE‬اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻲ( ‪55‬‬ ‫‪53 TRACK SELECTION‬‬ ‫‪) TV TYPE‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ‪51‬‬ ‫‪50 VIDEO SETUP‬‬ ‫‪52 VOLUME LIMIT‬‬ ‫‪A-Z‬‬ ‫‪47 A/V SYNC‬‬ ‫)‪52 AUDIO (HDMI‬‬ ‫‪) AUDIO‬اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪50‬‬ ‫‪53 AUDIO DRC‬‬ ‫‪107‬‬ ‫‪AR‬‬ (1) Sony Corporation Printed in China

Sony DAV-TZ200 Operating instructions

Related manuals

Sony

DAV-DZ790K

Sony

DAV-DZ570

Sony

DAV-DZ590K

Sony

DAV-DZ590K

Sony

DAV-DZ870W

Sony

DAV-HDX275

Sony

DAV-DZ777

Sony

DAV-FZ900KW

Sony

DAV-DZ290K

Sony

DAV-FXG99K

Sony

KLV-32D300A

Sony

KLV-26V300A